Rockwell Collins Tcas System Installation Manual PDF

installation
manual
TCAS II Traffic Alert and

Collision Avoidance System
installation manual
Export Control Classification Number (ECCN) for this document is

7E994.
© 2016 Rockwell Collins. All rights reserved.

March 04, 2016
TO: HOLDERS OF ROCKWELL COLLINS TCAS II TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION

AVOIDANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL (CPN 523-0820642)
DESCRIPTION OF EDITION NO 3, REVISION 1
Pages that have been added, revised, or deleted are indicated below with the highlights of the
revision. Change bars are used for technical changes only. Replace revised pages of the manual
with pages marked Change 1.
DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

PAGE NUMBER EFFECTIVITY
AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN
LEP-A thru LEP-B Updated to reflect current revision.
1-3 Removed TTR-921 from 28V primary
power list in Table 1-1.
1-6 through 1-7 Added TVI / Extended test details in
Tables 1-2 and 1-3.
1-16 Added aural annunciation details for
reduce climb / descent RAs.
2-5/(2-6 Blank) Updated TTR-920/-921/-2100
interconnect to include new radio alt
details.
interconnect to include new synchro
details.
interconnect to include new radio
program details.
interconnect to include new altimeter
input details.
interconnect to include new heading
validity and altitude program details.
4-4 Removed drop-in replacement details
from 4.1.2.1.4.
1
DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE
PAGE NUMBER EFFECTIVITY
AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN
4-5 Added clarification for TTR-2100 in
4.1.2.1.4.3.
5-30 through 5-31 Removed TTR-2100 references in
Troubleshooting section.
2
TCAS II Traffic Alert and Collision
Avoidance System
installation manual
Printed in the United States of America Rockwell Collins

© 2016 Rockwell Collins All Rights Reserved. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
523-0820642-003116
1st Edition, 28 June 2012
(_TCASII_IM__04_MAR_2016_) 3rd Edition, 1st Revision 04 March 2016
T-1
ROCKWELL COLLINS
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Export Control Classification Number (ECCN) for this document is 7E994.
PROPRIETARY NOTICE
FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT (5 USC 552) AND DISCLOSURE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

GENERALLY (18 USC 1905)
This document and the information disclosed herein are proprietary data of Rockwell Collins. Neither this
document nor the information contained herein shall be used, reproduced, or disclosed to others without the
written authorization of Rockwell Collins, except to the extent required for installation or maintenance of recipient’s
equipment. This document is being furnished in confidence by Rockwell Collins. The information disclosed herein
falls within the exemption (b) (4) of 5 USC 552 and the prohibitions of 18 USC 1905.
SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE
© 2013-2016 ROCKWELL COLLINS. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
We welcome your comments concerning this manual. Although every effort has been made to keep it free of
errors, some may occur. When reporting a specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the manual part
number, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.
Send your comments to: Rockwell Collins

350 Collins Road NE, M/S 153-250
Cedar Rapids, IA 52498-0001
EMAIL: pubstrain@rockwellcollins.com
For product orders or inquiries, please contact: Rockwell Collins

Customer Response Center
400 Collins Road NE, M/S 133-100
TELEPHONE: 1.888.265.5467
INTERNATIONAL: 1.319.265.5467
FAX NO: 319.295.4941
EMAIL: response@rockwellcollins.com
T-2
523-0820642
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES NOTE: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line
in the outer margins of the page. Changes to illustrations are indicated by
shaded or screened areas, or by miniature pointing hands.
Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original 0 . . . . . . 03 December 2015 Change 1 . . . . . . . . . . 04 March 2016
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 302 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change

No. No. No. No. No. No.
T-1 - T-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

A-B ..........................1 2-34 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-76 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
i - viii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-1 - 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-36 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-78 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-4 - 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-38 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-80 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-6 - 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-8 - 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-40 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-82 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-17 - 1-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-42 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-84 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-1 - 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-85 - 2-107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-4 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-44 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-108 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-6 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-46 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-110 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-8 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-48 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-112 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-10 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-50 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-114 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-16 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-56 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-120 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-71 - 2-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
*Zero in this column indicates an original page.
Change 1 A
523-0820642
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES NOTE: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a vertical line
in the outer margins of the page. Changes to illustrations are indicated by
shaded or screened areas, or by miniature pointing hands.
Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change

No. No. No. No. No. No.
2-137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-30 - 5-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2-138 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-154 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-32 - 5-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-40 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-140 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-156 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-157 - 2-166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-42 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-142 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-1 - 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3-6 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-44 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-144 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-1 - 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-4 - 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5-46 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-146 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-6 - 4-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4-12 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-48 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-148 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-1 - 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-49 - 5-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-6 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-70 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-150 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-8 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 6-2 Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-152 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5-9 - 5-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
*Zero in this column indicates an original page.
B Change 1
523-0820642
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Para Page
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 EQUIPMENT COVERED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4.1 Equipment Covered, Related Rublications, and Configurations Matrices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4.2 Svstem Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4.3 Equipment Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.5 RELATED PUBLICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3.1 Cabling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3.2 Aircraft Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3.3 TCAS II System, Mating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
2.3.4 Function Selection Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2.3.5 Program Pins Selection and Strapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.3.6 Wiring Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.3.7 Equipment Mechanical Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.4 PREPARATION PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.4.1 Visual Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.5 TCAS II LINE REPLACEABLE UNIT MOUNTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.5.1 TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.6 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
2.6.1 TTR-920/-921 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
2.6.2 TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/FWTA Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
2.6.3 TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
2.6.4 TRE-920( ) TCAS II Directional Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
2.6.5 L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna (for TCAS and Transponders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
2.6.6 TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
2.6.7 TTR-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 OPERATION PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.3 TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.4 WXI-711 Weather Radar Indicator, Controls and Indicators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.5 TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.6 TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 THEORY OF OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Principle of TCAS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
i
523-0820642
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter/Para Page
4.1.2 TCAS II Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
5 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 Adjustment/Test.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.2 Post-Installation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.3 TCAS Svstem-Interface Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.4 On-Ground Display Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.5 Self-Test In-Air Inhibit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.6 Heading Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.7 Dual Radio Altimeter System Failure Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.8 Single Radio Altimeter System Failure Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.9 Dual Transponder System Failure Monitoring.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.10 Single Transponder System Failure Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.11 Barometric Altimeter System Failure Monitoring.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.12 VSI/RA/TA Indicator Failure Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.13 VSI/RA Indicators With Separate Traffic Indicator Failure Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.14 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver Failure Monitoring.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.15 Radio Altimeter Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.16 TCAS Mode, Range, and ABOVE-N-BELOW Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.2.17 Full-Time/Pop-Up Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.2.18 Aircraft Altitude Limit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.2.19 Aircraft Increased-Climb Inhibit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.2.20 Aircraft Climb Inhibit Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.2.21 Aural Warning Priorities: TCAS OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.2.22 Aural Warning Priorities: TA ONLY/Audio Inhibit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.2.23 Bearing Accuracy: Top Directional Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.2.24 Bearing Accuracy: Bottom Directional Antenna.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.2.25 Change 7.1 Update: Aural Check of "Level Off, Level Off". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.2.26 Bottom Omnidirectional Antenna Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.3.1 Dual Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.3.2 Troubleshooting Aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.3.3 Aircraft Wiring Strapping for TCAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.3.4 JcAlR 429E/429EX Operating Procedures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.3.5 Strapping Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.4 TCAS INSTALLATION SYSTEMS TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.4.1 Problem Troubleshooting.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.4.2 TCAS Testing Hints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.4.3 Label 350 Fault Data Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.4.4 Label 350 Fault Data Trap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.4.5 NVM Fault Data Extraction via Label 356 Maintenance Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
6 Bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 SERVICE BULLETINS AND SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
ii
523-0820642
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Number Title Page

1 ESDS Caution Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
1-1 TCAS II Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 Positive RA Weakens To 0 FPM with Green Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
2-1 TTR-920/-921/-2100 Interconnect Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-2 TRE-920( )/TTR-920/-921/-2100 Antenna Interconnect Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-3 Dual TVI-920 Interconnect Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-4 Dual Transponder Antenna Installation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-5 TPR-720 Using Gillham Altitude Encoding, Simplified Interconnect Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2-6 TPR-720 and ATCRBS Transponders Using Gillham Altitude Encoding, Simplified Interconnect Wiring Diagram . . . 2-31
2-7 Dual TPR-720 Interconnect Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2-8 TPR-720 and 621A-6/6A Interconnect Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2-9 TPR-720 and 621A-3 Interconnect Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2-10 TCAS II, Component Rear Connector Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2-11 TTR-920 Outline and Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2-12 TTR-921 Outline and Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2-13 TTR-2100 Outline and Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
2-14 TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
2-15 TTC-920/-920G Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
2-16 TTC-920A Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
2-17 TRE-920 Directional Antenna (CPN 622-8973-001 through -004), Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2-18 TRE-920 Directional Antenna (CPN 622-8973-101 through -104), Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
2-19 TPR-720 Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145
2-20 900 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
2-21 TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2-22 TRE-920 Directional Antenna Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
4-1 Representative TVI-920 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Representative TCAS Displays on the WXI-711 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 Typical TCAS II System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-4 TPR-900/TPR-901 Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-5 Transmitter Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-6 Receiver Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-7 Signal Processing Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
5-1 Antenna Attenuator Cap Fabrication Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-2 TCAS System Fault Isolation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-3 Transponder Fault Isolation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-4 Example Word Reader Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5-5 Word Reader Interconnect Cable Fabrication Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
iii
523-0820642
LIST OF TABLES
Number Title Page

1-1 Equipment Covered in this Manual.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 TVI-920 Configuration Matrix.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 TVI-920D Configuration Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 TCAS II System, Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 Baseline Logic Parameter Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-7 Change 6.04A Enhanced Logic Parameter Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-8 Aural Annunciation Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-9 Reduced Altitude Thresholding Between 30 000 and 42 000 Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-10 TTR-920/-921/-2100 Transmitter-Receiver Specifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-11 TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator, Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-12 TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control, Specifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-13 TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna, Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-14 TRE-920C TCAS II Directional Antenna, Specifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-15 TPR- 720 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-16 TPR-900 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-17 TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1-18 Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
2-1 Connection-Wire Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 TCAS II System, Mating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
2-3 ARINC 718A-4 Transponder Plug Pin Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
2-4 Maximum Number of Intruder Symbols that can be Simultaneously Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
2-5 Pin Inhibit TA/RA Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
2-6 TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Antenna Insertion Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2-7 Pins used to Program the Audio Signal Output Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2-8 Differences in Failure Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2-9 Mode S Address Connector Pin Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2-10 TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Aircraft Category Program Pin No.s 1, 2, and 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2-11 GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2-12 Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity NACv Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
2-13 Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity NACv Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2-14 System Design Assurance (SDA) Encoding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
2-15 Aircraft Category Encoding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
2-16 ADS-B Configuration Parity Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
2-17 ADS-B Receive Capability Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2-18 New Unit Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
3-1 TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver, Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-3 TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control, Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-4 WXI-711 Weather Radar Indicator, Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-5 TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-6 TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
5-1 Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Hexadecimal to Binary Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5-3 Label 357-to-Strapping Configuration Reference.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5-4 Problem Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5-5 Label 350 Maintenance Word Bit Coding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5-6 Pointer Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5-7 Pointer Flag Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5-8 TCAS R/T Maintenance Fault Memory Word/Bit Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
6-1 Service Bulletins and Service Information Letters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
iv
523-0820642
INTRODUCTION
1. GENERAL.
THE MATERIAL IN THIS MANUAL IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE. BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY

MAINTENANCE OPERATION ON THE EQUIPMENT COVERED IN THIS MANUAL, VERIFY THAT
YOU HAVE COMPLETE AND UP-TO-DATE PUBLICATIONS BY REFERRING TO THE APPLICABLE
PUBLICATIONS AND SERVICE BULLETINS INDEXES.
This Installation Manual includes installation instructions for the TCAS II Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System. The in-
stallation instructions are presented in the following chapters: General Information, Installation, Operation, Theory of Operation,
Maintenance, and Service Bulletins and Service Information Letters. This installation manual provides shop verified procedures that
will enable a mechanic unfamiliar with the system to isolate a fault to the unit level. The procedures are prepared for the aircraft
mechanic, not for the mechanic that performs shop work.
2. ACRONYM AND ABBREVIATION , AND MNEMONICS.
The list that follows shows the abbreviations, acronyms, and mnemonics that are used in this publication to describe the avionics
system.
A/C Aircraft
A/D Analog-to-Digital
AC Alternating Current
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
AGL Above Ground Level
APM Avionics Personality Module
ARINC Aeronautical Radio, INCorporated
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATCRBS Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System
AWG American Wire Gauge
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
CAS Crew Alerting System
CoC Clear of Conflict
CPN Collins Part Number
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CW Continuous Wave
D/A Digital-to-Analog
dBm Decibel(s) referenced to 1 milliwatt
DC Direct Current
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DPSK Differential Phase Shift Keying
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESDS Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FPM Feet Per Minute
HEX Hexadecimal
HIRF High Intensity Radio Frequency
I/O Input/Output
IF Intermediate Frequency
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
v
introduction 523-0820642
LED Light-Emitting Diode

LRA Line Replaceable Assembly
LRU Line Replaceable Units
MCU Modular Concept Unit
MFM Maintenance Fault Memory
MHz MegaHertz
MOPS Minimum Operational Performance Standard
MTL Minimum Triggering Level
NACv Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity
nmi Nautical Miles
PAM Pulse Amplitude Modulation
RA Resolution Advisory
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
ROM Read-Only Memory
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
SAW Surface Acoustic Wave
SPI Special Position Identification
SSR Secondary Surveillance Radar
STBY Standby
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
TA Traffic Advisory
TA Traffic Advisories
TC Type Certificate
TCAS Traffic Collision Avoidance System
TPR Transponder
TRE TCAS Radiating Element
TTC TCAS II Transponder Control
TTR Transmitter-Receiver
TVI TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicators
UUT Unit Under Test
VA Volt-Amperes
VSI Vertical Speed Indicator
VSL Vertical Speed Limit
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WXI Weather Radar
To submit comments regarding this manual, please contact:
Rockwell Collins
350 Collins Rd NE, M/S 153-250
or send email to: pubstrain@rockwellcollins.com
vi
523-0820642
SAFETY SUMMARY
1. GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS.
SERVICE PERSONNEL ARE TO OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SUCH AS WEARING

SAFETY GLASSES, TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY WHILE INSTALLING OR DOING MAINTE-
NANCE ON THIS UNIT.
USE CARE WHEN USING SEALANTS, SOLVENTS AND OTHER CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS. DO
NOT EXPOSE TO EXCESSIVE HEAT OR OPEN FLAME. USE ONLY WITH ADEQUATE VENTILA-
TION. AVOID PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS AND AVOID PROLONGED CONTACT WITH
SKIN. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS GIVEN BY THE MANUFACTURER.
REMOVE ALL POWER TO THE UNIT BEFORE DISASSEMBLING IT. DISASSEMBLING THE UNIT
WITH POWER CONNECTED IS DANGEROUS TO LIFE AND MAY CAUSE VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS
THAT CAN DAMAGE THE UNIT.
MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY MASTER SWITCH IS TURNED OFF BEFORE IN-
STALLING ANY OF THE INTERCONNECT CABLING. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD CAUSE ELEC-
TRICAL ARCING THAT MIGHT RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
(AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT).
MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY MASTER SWITCH IS TURNED OFF BEFORE
INSTALLING ANY EQUIPMENT, MOUNTS, OR INTERCONNECT CABLES. FAILURE TO DO
SO COULD CAUSE ELECTRICAL ARCING THAT MIGHT RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE
EQUIPMENT OR SERIOUS INJURY TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL.
REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE TCAS II BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING IT. TO
INSTALL OR REMOVE ANY PART OF THE TCAS II WITHOUT FIRST REMOVING ALL ELECTRICAL
POWER CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE TCAS II AVIONIC EQUIPMENT.
vii
safety summary 523-0820642
THIS UNIT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) COMPONENTS AND

ESDS ASSEMBLIES THAT CAN BE DAMAGED BY STATIC VOLTAGES. ALTHOUGH MOST ESDS
COMPONENTS CONTAIN INTERNAL PROTECTION CIRCUITS, GOOD PROCEDURES DICTATE
CAREFUL HANDLING OF ALL ESDS COMPONENTS AND ESDS ASSEMBLIES.
Figure 1. ESDS Caution Symbol
Obey the precautions given below when moving, touching, or repairing all Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) components
and units containing ESDS components.
1. Deenergize or remove all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
2. Place the unit on a work surface that can conduct electricity (is grounded).
3. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-kΩ or 1-MΩ series resistor to prevent
unit or unit component damage.
4. Ground any tools (and soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the operator's hand is a sufficient ground
for hand tools that are electrically isolated.
5. All ESDS replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in their shipping containers
until installed.
6. ESDS devices and assemblies that are removed from a unit must immediately be put on the conductive work surface or in
conductive containers.
7. Place repaired or disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have a layer of, or are made with, conductive
material.
8. Do not touch ESDS devices/assemblies or remove them from their containers until they are needed.
FAILURE TO HANDLE ESDS DEVICES AS DESCRIBED ABOVE CAN PERMANENTLY DAMAGE

THEM. THIS DAMAGE CAN CAUSE IMMEDIATE OR PREMATURE DEVICE FAILURE.
viii
523-0820642
CHAPTER 1
General Information
1.1. INTRODUCTION.
The intent of this publication is to provide the required information to install the Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) II. This
manual shows specifications, instructions on hardware installation, instructions on software installation, system cable and connector
diagrams, and self-test procedures necessary to install, test, and troubleshoot the Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) II.
1.2. EQUIPMENT COVERED.

The TCAS II is covered in this manual. Refer to Figure 1-1 for an illustration of the TCAS II.
Figure 1-1. TCAS II Equipment
1.3. PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT.

The purpose of the TCAS II is to monitor a volume of airspace about the aircraft and interrogate any intruding aircraft’s transponder,
to determine whether or not a potential airspace conflict exists.
1-1
general information 523-0820642
1.4. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION.

The TCAS II system is an aid to flight safety. Associated displays indicate the presence of nearby airborne traffic and advise of
maneuvers which may be necessary for traffic avoidance. Monitoring is done by computing the point of closest approach using the
range, altitude, bearing, and closure rate of other transponder-equipped aircraft, with respect to the TCAS-equipped aircraft. Outputs
from the TCAS II system are voice messages and visual displays on the associated vertical speed indicator and traffic advisory or
weather radar indicator. A basic TCAS II system consists of the following equipment.
• 1 TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver
• 2 TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicators (TVI)
• 1 TTC-920 TCAS II Transponder Control
• 1 TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna
• 1 L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna (for TCAS)
• 2 TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S (Transponders and associated antennas.)
• 4 L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna (for transponder)
Options include:
• 1 TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna (Bottom-mounted, to replace the bottom-mounted L-band omnidirectional antenna.)
• 1 TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder (Second transponder remains an ATCRBS-only transponder, such as a 621A-3,
621A-6 or 621A-6A.)
• 1 TTC-920A TCAS II Transponder Control (Controls one ATC/Mode S transponder and one ATCRBS-only transponder.)
• 1 or 2 TCAS-Compatible Indicators - Displays traffic advisories
• 2 L- Band Omnidirectional Antenna (or transponder.)
1.4.1. Equipment Covered, Related Rublications, and Configurations Matrices.

Refer to Table 1-1 for a list of equipment covered in this manual, Table 1-18 for a list of related publications, and Table 1-2 through
Table 1-4 for matrices that describe various configurations of panel colors, switch labels and lighting for the TVI-920( ) and TTC-
920( ).
1-2
Table 1-1. Equipment Covered in this Manual.
MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION ROCKWELL

COLLINS PART
NUMBER
TTR-920/-921 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. Major component of TCAS II system. Contains 622-8971 -020, -022,
all circuits necessary for computing, transmitting, and receiving functions -120, -122, -320, -322,
of TCAS system and interfacing with transponder(s), antennas and display. -420, -422, -500, -522,
Requires 115V ac, 400-Hz primary power. (-120, -122 status TTR-920 use -620, -622, -700, -820
28V dc primary power) 822-1293- 001, -002,
TTR-921: Has Version 7.1 software. This enables the reversal logic to allow more -033, -220, -320, -321,
opportunity for either aircraft in a TCAS II to TCAS II encounter to command -322, -332
a reversal of the initial RA. The Adjust Vertical Speed advisories simplifies the
number of RAs in this category to one RA and changes the aural message to
"Level Off, Level Off".
Multidisk and Dataload are required, if installation of Change V7.1 becomes
necessary.
NOTE
1.The TTR-920 cannot be upgraded to meet TCAS v7.1. It does not have
memory that is capable of supporting the functional changes. To meet the
TCAS v7.1 mandate, replace TTR-920 with an upgraded TTR-921.
TTR-921:
-001 is not upgradeable.
-002 must be upgraded with SB 404.
-033 has 7.1.
-220, -320, and -321 are not upgradeable.
-322 must be upgraded with SB 404.
-332 has 7.1
TTR-2100 The TTR-2100 Airborne Collision Avoidance System (ACAS) provides a 822-2911 -001, -002,
completely integrated traffic computer system. The TTR-2100 ACAS is an -020, -021, -300
AC-powered replacement for the TTR-920/921 ACAS units.
TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator. Displays conventional vertical speed along 622-9353-001, -003,
with TCAS II Resolution Advisory Resolution Advisory (RA) and Traffic -011, -013, -021, -023,
Advisory (TA) information from TTR-920/-921/-2100. Display is full-color, flat -111, -113, -121, -123,
panel Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Interfaces with all common electric and -211, -213, -221, -223,
pneumatic Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) data sources as well as Aeronautical -311, -313, -321, -323,
Radio, INCorporated (ARINC) 429 data bus signals from TTR-920/-921/-2100. -411, -413, -421, -423,
(Refer to TVI-920 Configuration Matrix Table 1-2 , or TVI-920D Configuration -621, -623
Matrix Table 1-3 for options.)
Change 1 1-3
Table 1-1. Equipment Covered in this Manual. - Continued

COLLINS PART
NUMBER
TVI-920D Same as TVI-920, except has 28V dc power supply. 622-9728-011, -012,
-013, -014, -021, -022,
-023, -024, -111, -112,
-113, -114, -121, -122,
-123, -124, -211, -212,
-213, -214, -221, -222,
-223, -224, -311, -312,
-313, -314, -321, -322,
-323, -324, -411, -412,
-413, -414, -421, -422,
-423, -424
WXI-711 Weather Radar (WXI)/TCAS Indicator. Displays conventional weather 622-6514-001 , -002,
radar information simultaneously with TCAS II TA information from -004, -006, -016, -020,
TTR-920/-921/-2100. -021, -022, -023, -101,
-102, -103, -104, -105,
-106, -108, -109, -201,
-203, -205, -206, -207,
-208, -209, -210, -212,
-213, -215, -216, -218,
-219, -220, -221, -222,
-223, -224, -245, -299,
-301, -409, -410, -411,
-500, -513, -601, -602,
-701, -702, -703
TTC-920 TCAS II Transponder Control. Controls two mode S transponders. (Refer to 622-8974-001, -003,
TTC-920 Configuration Matrix Table for options.) -006, -008, -010, -013,
-016, -017, -118, -132,
-210, -304, -309, -311,
-312, -314, -315, -319
TTC-920A TCAS II Transponder Control (TTC). Controls one mode S and one analog Air 622-9288-003, -004,
Traffic Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS) transponder (621A-3, 621A-6, -005, -006, -007, -008
or 621A-6A). (Refer to TTC-920A Configuration Matrix Table 1-4 for options.)
TTC-920G Same as 622-8974-XXX, except has different fault monitor logic specific to 822-0078-003, -005, -201
interface with TDR-94D.
TRE-920 TCAS Radiating Element (TRE), TCAS II Directional Antenna. 622-8973-001
Radiates/receives in both polarized (vertical) or omnidirectional patterns.
Mounting base is flat with four mounting holes.
TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna. Same as -001 version, except the mounting base 622-8973-003
has a 74-inch (1.88-m) radius.
TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna. Same as -001 version except the mounting base 622-8973-004
has a 111-inch (2.82-m) radius.
TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna. Same as -001 version except that it has eight 622-8973-104
mounting holes and the mounting base has a 111-inch (2.82-m) radius.
1-4
Table 1-1. Equipment Covered in this Manual. - Continued

COLLINS PART
NUMBER
TRE-920C TCAS II Directional Antenna. Is not certified for use with TTR-921 TCAS II 622-9922-101
Transmitter-Receiver.
TPR-720/ ATC/Mode S Transponder. Provides responses to all ATCRBS and mode S 622-7878-001, -020,
-900/-901 interrogators. It has data link capabilities. It contains on-board maintenance -120, -200, -201,
system compatible with broadcast and menu mode systems. -301, -440 -460, -480
822-0336-001, -020,
-220, -440, -460, -480,
-902 822-1338-001, -002,
-003, -004, -005, -020,
-021, -205, -225
Table 1-2. TVI-920 Configuration Matrix.
PART NUMBER PANEL COLOR SWITCH FUNCTIONS

LEFT RIGHT
622-9353-001 Brown ─ ─
622-9353-003 Brown ─ ─
622-9353-011 Black ─ ─
622-9353-013 Black ─ ─
622-9353-021 Gray ─ ─
622-9353-023 Gray ─ ─
622-9353-111* Black ─ ─
622-9353-113* Black ─ ─
622-9353-121* Gray ─ ─
622-9353-123* Gray ─ ─
622-9353-211 Black MODE RANGE
622-9353-221 Gray MODE RANGE
622-9353-311* Black A/B RANGE
622-9353-321* Gray A/B RANGE
622-9353-323* Gray A/B RANGE
622-9353-411* Black MODE RANGE
1-5
Table 1-2. TVI-920 Configuration Matrix. - Continued

LEFT RIGHT
622-9353-421* Gray MODE RANGE
* Extended test mode and
extended test ranges
NOTE
Only TTR-921 and TTR-4000 units support extended test mode when appropriate TVIs are installed. The TTR-2100 does
not have extended test mode capabilities.
Table 1-3. TVI-920D Configuration Matrix.

LEFT RIGHT
622-9728-011 Black ─ ─
622-9728-012 Black ─ ─
622-9728-013 Black ─ ─
622-9728-014 Black ─ ─
622-9728-021 Gray ─ ─
622-9728-022 Gray ─ ─
622-9728-023 Gray ─ ─
622-9728-024 Gray ─ ─
622-9728-111* Black ─ ─
622-9728-112* Black ─ ─
622-9728-113* Black ─ ─
622-9728-114* Black ─ ─
622-9728-121* Gray ─ ─
622-9728-122* Gray ─ ─
622-9728-123* Gray ─ ─
622-9728-124* Gray ─ ─
1-6 Change 1
Table 1-3. TVI-920D Configuration Matrix. - Continued

LEFT RIGHT
622-9728-321* Gray A/B RANGE
622-9728-322* Gray A/B RANGE
622-9728-323* Gray A/B RANGE
622-9728-324* Gray A/B RANGE
* Has extended test and
extended TCAS range
capability
NOTE
1. MODE switches between POP-UP and FULL-TIME traffic display.
2. RANGE Switches between 6 nmi and 12 nmi.
3. Colors:
Brown BAC 8328 (Rockwell Collins part no 580-0165-012)
Black FED-STD-595 Color No 37038
Gray FED-STD-595 Color No 361 18
NOTE
Only TTR-921 and TTR-4000 units support extended test mode when appropriate TVIs are installed. The TTR-2100 does
not have extended test mode capabilities.
Change 1 1-7
Table 1-4. TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix.

ROCKWELL COLORS LIGHT- BOTTOM SWITCHES TOP SWITCHES FA1L
COLLINS
PART PANEL KNOBS ING A4S 1 W2S4 W2S5 A4S3 A2S2 W2S8 A2S3 A2S1 LIGHT
NUMBER
TTC-920
622-8974-001 Gray Gray 5 V ac TEST, — IDENT 1-2 — — — ALT-0FF YES
STBY,
XPDR, TA,
TA/RA
622-8974-003 Gray Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- RNG — 1 -OFF-2 YES
(See NOTE 3.) TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
622-8974-006 Gray Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 — — — 1 -OFF-2 YES
TA/RA, TA,
XPDR
622-8974-008 Gray Gray 5 V ac TEST, IDENT IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- RNG FL ALT-0FF YES
(See NOTE 3.) STBY, BELOW (W2S7) (W2S8)
XPDR,
TA/RA, TA
ONLY
622-8974-010 Gray Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- — — 1 -OFF-2 YES
TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
(See NOTE 3.) TA/RA, TA,
XPDR
622-8974-016 Gray Gray 5 V ac TEST, — IDENT 1-2 — — — 1-2 YES
STBY, ALT
RPTG OFF,
XPDR,
TA ONLY,
TA/RA
622-8974-017 Gray Gray 5 V ac TEST, IDENT — 1-2 ABOVE- RNG FL ALT-0FF YES
XPDR,
TA/RA, TA
ONLY
622-8974-118 Blue/ Gray 5 V ac TEST, IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- REL- ABOVE- REL-ABS YES
Gray STBY, BELOW ABS BELOW
XPDR, TA, (A2S4)
TA/RA, TFC
622-8974-132 Blue/ Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-STBY — — — ALT-0 FF YES
Gray AUTO, TA -2
ONLY
622-8974-210 Black Black 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- — — 1 -OFF-2 YES
TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
622-8974-304 Brown Beige 5 V ac TEST, — IDENT L-R ABOVE- REL- ABOVE- REL-ABS YES
STBY, BELOW ABS BELOW
XPDR, TA, (A2S4)
TA/RA
622-8974-309 Brown Beige 5 V ac TEST, IDENT — L-R ABOVE- REL- — ALT-0 FF —
STBY, BELOW ABS
XPDR, (A2S4)
TA/RA, TA
ONLY
1-8
Table 1-4. TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix. - Continued

COLLINS
NUMBER
622-8974-311 Brown Beige 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT L — — ALT-0 FF YES
TA/RA, TA, XPDR-R
XPDR
\622-8974-312 Brown Beige 5 V ac TEST, IDENT L-R ABOVE- REL- ABOVE- REL-ABS YES
STBY, BELOW ABS BELOW
XPDR, TA, (A2S4)
TA/RA
622-8974-314 Brown Beige 5 V ac TEST, — IDENT L-R — — — — YES
STBY, ALT
RPTG OFF,
XPDR,
TA ONLY,
TA/RA
622-8974-315 Brown Beige 5 V ac STBY, ALT — IDENT L-R — — — — —
RPTG OFF,
XPDR,
TA ONLY,
TA/RA
622-8974-319 Brown Beige 5 V ac TEST, IDENT — L-R ABOVE- RNG FL ALT-0 F F YES
XPDR,
TA/RA, TA
ONLY
TTC-920A (SEE NOTE 4)
622-9288-003 Gray Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT L-R — — — 1 -OFF-2 YES
TA/RA, TA,
XPDR
TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
TA/RA, TA,
XPDR
622-9288-006 Gray Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- — — ALT-0 F F YES
TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
622-9288-007 Gray Gray 5 V ac STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- RNG — 1 -OFF-2 YES
(See NOTE 3.) TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
622-9288-008 Gray Gray 5 V ac TEST, — IDENT 1-2 — — — ALT-0 F F YES
STBY,
XPDR, TA,
TA/RA
TTC-920G
TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
TA/RA, TA,
XPDR
1-9
Table 1-4. TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix. - Continued

COLLINS
NUMBER
822-0078-201 Black Black 28V dc STBY, TEST IDENT 1-2 ABOVE- — — 1 -OFF-2 YES
TA/RA, TA, BELOW
XPDR
NOTE
1. Panel Colors:
Brown.
Black
Gray
Blue/Gray
2. Knob Colors:
Beige
Black
Gray
3. Display Ranges:
Collins Part Number (CPN) 622-8974-XO3, -X17, -XI9 = 6, 12 nmi.
CPN 622-8974-X08 = 5, 10, 20, 40 nmi.
CPN 622-9288-007 = 6, 12 nmi.
4. On TTC-920A, A4S3, position 2 selects MODE C ONLY transmit.
5. Altitude limit on CPN 622-8974-X13 is 7000 feet. All other status have an altitude limit of 9900 feet.
6. Switch Locations.
1.4.2. Svstem Specifications.
1.4.2.1. TCAS II System Specifications. For the TCAS II specifications, refer to Table 1-5.
Table 1-5. TCAS II System, Specifications.
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Related documents
ARINC Characteristics 735A, 718, 604, 600-6, 404A, 615-3
RTCA documents DO-185B
FAA TSO C119c
Physical
Weight (basic system) 22.09 kg (48.7 lb), max
Environmental
Operation conditions
Temperature -15 to +71 C (5 to 159.70 F)
Altitude 0 to 13 716 m (0 to 50 000 ft)
Vibration 2g
Cooling Convective, forced air recommended
Electrical
1-10
Table 1-5. TCAS II System, Specifications. - Continued
Input voltage 115V ac *10%, 400 Hz; single phase
5V ac *10%, 400 Hz (for lighting)
28 ±2 V dc
1.4.2.2. Minimum Operational Performance Standard Changes. The minimum operational performance standard changes
follow:
NOTE
Paragraph 1.4.2.2.1 is applicable to TTR-920 units, CPNs 622- 8971-020, -120, -320, -420, -500, -620, and -820.
1.4.2.2.1. TCAS Change 6.04A Enhanced follows: The following items 1 through 7 provide information about the TCAS II in-
hibits, modes, and parameter changes made to enhance TCAS system performance and to make the system more compatible with
the Air Traffic Control (ATC) System.
1. RA Inhibit Altitude
TCAS inhibits all RAs when own aircraft is below the radio altimeter altitudes in the following listing.
BASELINE 6.04A ENHANCED
Aircraft Climbing: 600 ft AGL 1100 ft AGL

Aircraft Descending: 400 ft AGL 900 ft AGL
2. Aural Inhibit Altitude

All TCAS aural messages for Traffic Advisories (TA)s and Resolution Advisory (RA)s will be inhibited when own aircraft is
below the radio altimeter altitude in the following listing.

3. Descend RA Inhibit
The descend RA inhibit altitude remains unchanged, descend RAs will be inhibited when own aircraft is below the radio
altimeter altitudes in the following listing.

4. Increase Descend RA Inhibit
The increase descend RA inhibit altitude remains unchanged, increased descend RAs will be inhibited when own aircraft is
below the radio altimeter altitudes in the following listing.
Climbing/Descending: 1450 ft AGL 1450 ft AGL
1-11
5. TCAS Mode Change
With TNRA (AUTO) mode selected, this system will automatically switch from the TA ONLY mode to the TNRA (AUTO)
mode or from the TNRA (ONLY) mode to the TA ONLY mode at own aircraft radio altimeter altitudes in the following listing.
Aircraft Climbing (TA ONLY to TNRA 600 ft AGL 1100 AGL

mode):
Aircraft Descending (TNRA to TA ONLY 400 ft AGL
mode):
These altitudes are applicable in the absence of other aircraft inhibits being valid at a higher altitude. An example of this is on
descent, where the aircraft is both climb inhibited and descend inhibited at an altitude higher than 400 ft AGL (Baseline) or 900 ft
(Change 6.04A). The TCAS mode would change from TNRA to TA ONLY at that higher altitude.
6. Aircraft On Ground Altitude
TCAS uses own barometric and radio altitude to derive an estimate of an airport's barometric ground altitude. This altitude
plus a ground altitude allowance or offset is then used in determining when other aircraft are on the ground. Aircraft reporting
a barometric altitude that is less than this value are then declared on the ground.
Terrain fluctuations near the airport can, in some instances, result in the barometric ground altitude estimate being lower than
the airport elevation. As a result TCAS may issue TAs against aircraft that are on or near the ground. To prevent such traffic
advisories the ground altitude allowance value used by TCAS has been increased in accordance with the following listing.
190 ft ± 10 ft 1100 ft ±210 ft
7. TA and RA Threshold Parameter Changes
The occurrence of TAs against legally separated Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) traffic and when own aircraft is below 5000 feet
has resulted in changes to the vertical threshold and alarm time parameters. The threshold has been reduced from 1200 feet to 850
feet for altitudes up to FL300 (30 000 feet). The alarm time change allows TCAS to better adapt to the terminal airspace.
Similarly, RAs, either preventive or corrective, in the terminal area were considered to be excessive, as were RAs against
projected crossing threat traffic that levels off approximately 1000 feet away, both when own aircraft is level and when own
aircraft has a high vertical rate. It was also necessary to make the system more tolerant of assigned altitude overshoots of up to 400
feet. Changes were made to the vertical threshold and alarm time parameters for RAs to reduce the occurrence of these advisories.
The horizontal threshold distance shown in Table 1-6 and Table 1-7 is the minimum distance for an advisory. The distance is a
function of aircraft closure rate and alarm time.
Table 1-6 lists the baseline logic parameter values that are associated with each TCAS sensitivity level.
Table 1-7 lists the change 6.04A enhanced logic parameter values That are associated with each TCAS sensitivity level.
Immediate and smooth response to an RA is required to obtain maximum separation, while TCAS II RA algorithms are based
upon the pilot initiating the initial maneuver within 5 seconds of the RA, and within 2.5 seconds for additional corrective RAs
(increase or reversal) that may be issued. Any delay in responding to RAs will reduce the separation that is provided. The pilot
should respond immediately to the RA even if the intruder is not in visual contact.
1-12
Table 1-6. Baseline Logic Parameter Levels.
OWN ALTITUDE RADAR ALTITUDE RADAR ALTITUDE

(FEET) UP TO 500 500 - 2500 UP TO 10 000 10 000 - 20 000 20 000 - 30 000 ABOVE 30 000
TCAS MODE TA ONLY TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA
ALARM TIME
TRAFFIC 20 35 40 45 45 45
ADVISORY
RESOLUTION — 20 25 30 35 35
ADVISORY
HORIZONTAL
THRESHOLD
PROTECTED — 0.35 0.55 0.80 1.10 1.10
VOLUME
VERTICAL
THRESHOLD
TRAFFIC 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
ADVISORY
PREVENTIVE — 750 750 750 850 950
RESOLUTION
ADVlSORY
CORRECTIVE — 400 400 500 640 740
RESOLUTION
ADVlSORY
NOTE
Time in seconds, horizontal threshold in Nautical Miles (nmi) and vertical threshold in feet.
1-13
Table 1-7. Change 6.04A Enhanced Logic Parameter Levels.
OWN ALTI- RADAR ALTITUDE RADAR ALTITUDE

TUDE (FEET) UP TO 500 500 - 2500 UP TO 5000 5000- 10 000 10 000- 20 20 000- 30 ABOVE 30
000 000 000
TCAS MODE TA ONLY TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA TA/RA
ALARM TIME
TRAFFIC 20 25 30 40 45 48 48
ADVISORY
RESOLUTION — 15 20 25 30 35 35
ADVISORY
HORIZONTAL
THRESHOLD
PROTECTED — 0.20 0.35 0.55 .80 1.10 1.10
VOLUME
VERTICAL
THRESHOLD
TRAFFIC 850 850 8500 850 850 850 1200
ADVISORY
PREVENTIVE — 600 600 600 600 700 800
RESOLUTION
ADVISORY
CORRECTIVE — 300 300 350 400 600 700
RESOLUTION
ADVISORY
NOTE
Time in seconds, horizontal threshold in NMI and vertical threshold in feet.
1-14
1.4.2.3. TCAS Change 7.0.
NOTE
Paragraph 1.4.2.3 is applicable to TTR-920, CPNs 622-8971 -022, -122, -322, -422, -522, and -622. Also to
TTR-921, CPNs 822-12 93-001, -002, and -320.
Change 7.0 to the Minimum Operational Performance Standard (MOPS) for TCAS (or RTCA DO-185A) provides improvements
for TCAS II. Although the benefits of implementing Change 7.0 cannot be quantified in a safety analysis number, these benefits are
expected to improve the overall safety of the system when widely implemented in the field. The benefits of implementing Change
7.0 include:
• Large reduction in number of RAs (unnecessary ones filtered)
• Significantly improves compatibility with ATC
• Display and aural annunciations for RAs much more intuitive to pilots
• Many collision avoidance logic deficiencies are resolved
• Surveillance and interference limiting changes improve situational awareness and reduce TCAS effect on ATC Secondary Surveil-
lance Radar (SSR).
1.4.2.3.1. Revised Aural Annunciations. Some of the aural annunciations have been revised as defined by DO-185A. Refer to
Table 1-8 for the Changes 6.04A, 7.0, 7.1, messages, and the proper pilot response to aural messages.
Table 1-8. Aural Annunciation Changes.
VERSION 6.04 VERSION 7.0 VERSION 7.1 PROPER PILOT RESPONSE

ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATION
Clear of Conflict Clear of Conflict Clear of Conflict Resume normal flight, apparent conflict of airspace has
been resolved.
Traffic, Traffic Traffic, Traffic Traffic, Traffic Gain visual contact of traffic. Check TCAS display for
traffic bearing and range if necessary. Assess the threat
and prepare to execute the evasive maneuver TCAS
issues.
Monitor Vertical Monitor Vertical Monitor Vertical Speed Be alert for approaching traffic. Make sure that the VSI
Speed, Speed needle does not enter the area of the red-lighted scale
Monitor Vertical segments on the TCAS VSI/RA/TA display.
Speed,
Monitor Vertical Maintain Vertical Maintain Vertical Maintain present vertical speed and direction. Make
Speed, Speed, Maintain Speed, Maintain sure that the VSI needle does not enter the area of the
Monitor Vertical red-lighted scale segments on the TCAS VSI/RA/TA
Speed, display.
Monitor Vertical Adjust Vertical Adjust Vertical Speed, Indicates a weakening of the RA. Allows pilot to start
Speed Speed, Adjust Adjust returning to an assigned altitude
Climb, Climb, Climb Climb, Climb Climb, Climb Change vertical speed to 1 500 ft/min climbing, as
indicated on TCAS VSI/RA/TA display.
Climb, Crossing Climb, Crossing Climb, Crossing Same as CLIMB, except that it further indicates that
Climb, Climb, Climb, Climb, Climb, Climb, flight paths will cross at some altitude.
Crossing Climb Crossing Climb Crossing Climb
1-15
Table 1-8. Aural Annunciation Changes. - Continued
VERSION 6.04 VERSION 7.0 VERSION 7.1 PROPER PILOT RESPONSE

ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATION
Descend, Descend, Descend, Descend Descend, Descend Change vertical speed to 1500 ft/min descending, as
Descend indicated on TCAS VSI/RA/TA display.
Descend, Crossing Descend, Crossing Descend, Crossing Same as DESCEND except that it further indicates that
Descend, Descend, Descend, Descend, Descend, Descend, flight paths will cross at some altitude.
Crossing Descend Crossing Descend Crossing Descend
Reduce Climb, Adjust Vertical Level Off, Level Off Reduce climbing vertical speed to that shown on TCAS
Reduce Climb Speed, Adjust VSI/RA/TA display.
Reduce Descent, Adjust Vertical Level Off, Level Off Reduce descending vertical speed to that shown on
Reduce Descent Speed, Adjust TCAS VSI/RA/TA display.
Corrective Reduce Adjust Vertical Level Off, Level Off Aural annunciation for the weakening of corrective RAs.
Climb, Descent RAs Speed, Adjust
Increase Climb, Increase Climb, Increase Climb, This follows CLIMB advisory. The climb vertical speed
Increase Climb Increase Climb Increase Climb should be increased, typically to 2500 ft/min, as shown
on TCAS VSI/RA/TA display.
Increase Descent, Increase Descent, Increase Descent, This follows DESCEND advisory. The descent vertical
Increase Descent Increase Descent Increase Descent speed should be increased, typically to 2500 ft/min, as
shown on TCAS VSI/RA/TA display.
Climb, Climb NOW, Climb, Climb NOW, Climb, Climb NOW, This follows DESCEND advisory. This advisory
Climb, Climb NOW Climb, Climb NOW Climb, Climb NOW indicates that a reversal of vertical speed from descent
to climb is needed to provide adequate separation.
Descend, Descend Descend, Descend Descend, Descend This follows a CLIMB advisory. This advisory indicates
NOW, Descend, NOW, Descend, NOW, Descend, that a reversal of vertical speed from climb to descent is
Descend NOW Descend NOW Descend NOW needed to provide adequate separation.
1.4.2.3.2. Revised Thresholds for Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM). Vertical thresholds for TAs and RAs have been
increased between 30 000 feet and 42 000 feet compared to Change 6.04A. Refer to Table 1-9. The beneficial changes for RVSM
include:
• Aircraft with 1000 feet vertical separation will not generate TA
• Eliminates nuisance repetitive Traffic Advisory on RVSM routes in slow-closure-rate situations
• The criteria for dropping a TA against an intruder has been made more stringent, so repetitive TA against the same intruder are
reduced significantly in slow-closure encounters.
1-16 Change 1
Table 1-9. Reduced Altitude Thresholding Between 30 000 and 42 000 Feet.
OWN ALTITUDE
DESCRIPTION CHANGE 6.04A CHANGE 7.0
20 000- 30 000 FT ABOVE 30 000 FT 20 000- 42 000 FT ABOVE 42 000 FT

TA 850 ft 1200 ft 850 ft 1200 ft
PREVENTIVE RA 700 ft 800 ft 700 ft 800 ft
CORRECTIVE RA 600 ft 700 ft 600 ft 700 ft
1.4.2.3.3. Lower Aural Inhibit Thresholds. In Change 6.04A all aural annunciations are inhibited below 1000 feet Above Ground
Level (AGL). Change 7.0 allows aurals to be annunciated down to 500 feet AGL. Although the RA inhibit threshold is still 1000 feet
AGL. The benefit of this change is that Traffic, Traffic will be annunciated down to 500 feet providing better situational awareness
of traffic advisories while on approach.
1.4.2.3.4. Positive RA Weakens to 0 Feet Per Minute (FPM) Vertical Speed Limit (VSL) with Green Arc.
1.4.2.3.4.1. In Change 6.04A, a positive RA could weaken one or more times to 0 500, 1000, 1500-FPM vertical speed limit RAs
during the course of an encounter. The weakening showed only a red arc indicating where not to fly.
1.4.2.3.4.2. In Change 7.0, a positive RA (Climb/Descend, Maintain Rate, and Sense Reversals) is only allowed to weaken to a
0-FPM vertical speed limit RA. A green arc is displayed at 0 FPM. Refer to Figure 1-2.
1.4.2.3.4.3. The benefits of this change include:
• Expected response throughout the RA will be clearer
• Expected response will be more consistent with actual observed behavior of pilots
• Altitude displacements caused by RAs will be reduced.
1-17
Figure 1-2. Positive RA Weakens To 0 FPM with Green Arc
1.4.2.4. TCAS Change 7.1.
NOTE
Paragraph 1.4.2.4 is applicable to TTR-921. (TTR-920 cannot be modified to accept Change 7.1.) The TTR-2100
meets the requirements of Change 7.1.
Change 7.1 to the Minimum Operational Performance Standard (MOPS) for TCAS (or RTCA DO-185B) provides improvements
for TCAS II. Implementing Change 7.1 makes the TTR-921 compliant with RTCA/DO-185B, change 1 MOPS for TCAS and ICAO
ACAS II SARPs (Standards and Recommended Practices).
1.4.3. Equipment Specifications.
The following paragraphs show equipment specifications for the TCAS II Line Replaceable Units (LRU).
1.4.3.1. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. Refer to Table 1-10 for the TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II
Transmitter-Receiver specifications.
1-18
Table 1-10. TTR-920/-921/-2100 Transmitter-Receiver Specifications.
TTR-920 TTR-2100
Related documents:
TSO C119A for 6.04A Enhanced
software
C119B for Change 7.0
software
C119c for Change C119c for Change 7.1
7.1 software software
TSO Identification Plate,
Physical CPN 829-0330-021 (Must be
used after Nov 21/11.)
Size
Height 194 mm (7.64 in) 194.1 mm (7.64 in)

Width 194.6 mm (7.77 in) 195.1 mm (7.68 in)
Length 387.6 mm (15.26 in) 387.6 mm (15.26 in)
Weight 9.0 kg (19.8 lb.) max 8.4 kg (18.5 lb.) max 6.7 kg (14.8 lb) max
6.3 kg (13.8 lb) nom
Cooling Convection; no forced air
required.
Maintenance requirement On condition
Functional
Advisory time 20 to 25 seconds for
resolution advisory (RA)
40 to 45 seconds for traffic
advisory (TA)
Tracking capability 60 targets tracked (30 targets
displayed)
Surveillance range 14 nmi minimum, 30 nrni
typical
Bearing accuracy <5º rrns
Transmitter Radio 55 ±2 Decibel(s) referenced 160 to 400 W
Frequency (RF) output to 1 milliwatt (dBm), 200 to
500 W
Whisper/shout attenuation 26 Decibel (dB) in 1-dB steps
Transmit frequency 1030 ±0.01
MegaHertz (MHz)
Receive frequency 1090 ±3 MHz
Receive bandwidth 9 MHz
1-19
Table 1-10. TTR-920/-921/-2100 Transmitter-Receiver Specifications. - Continued
Receive sensitivity -74 ±2 dBm -85 ±2 dBm
Mode S data rate 4 MHz ±0.05%
Electrical
Primary power
TTR-920 (-020) 115 V ac, 400 Hz, 80 W 115 V ac, 400 Hz, 35W
115 V ac, 400 Hz; 80 W, nom max 28 V dc, ±20%, 2.8 A nominal, 70 W max
TTR-920 (-120, -122, nominal, 80 W max
-420, and -421)
28 V dc, ±20%, 2.8 A
nominal, 80 W max
Power factor 0.80
Environmental category TTR-920 TTR-921 TTR-2100
Parameter DO-160B Category DO-160D Category DO-160F Category
Temperature and Altitude A2/D2 A2/D2 (Note) A2/D2 (Note)
Temperature Variation C B B.5 °C (+9 °F) /minute
Humidity A B B, 240 hours
Shock TEST B B
Vibration J and Y S, Curves Y, L, M, and C H, Curve R
R, Curve BB1
S, Curves Y, L, M, and
C
Explosion X E E
Waterproofness X X X
Fluids Susceptibility X X F
Sand and Dust X X X
Fungus Resistance X X X
Salt Spray A X X
Magnetic Effect A Z Z
Power Input A B and Z A (WF) XILP
Voltage Spike Conducted A A A
Audio Frequency Conducted A Z K (WF)
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility A C CW
Radio Frequency A WWX WWR
Susceptibility
Emission of RF Energy A M M
1-20
Table 1-10. TTR-920/-921/-2100 Transmitter-Receiver Specifications. - Continued
Lightning-induced Transient K Z3Z4 B3G43
Susceptibility
Lightning direct effect X X X
Icing X X X
Electrostatic discharge A A
NOTE
The DO-160B temperature/altitude category is A2/D2 which specifies altitude and decompression testing to 50 000 feet.
The actual testing was performed to 50 000 feet to comply with a maximum service ceiling requirement for a particular
aircraft.
1-21
1.4.3.2. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator. Refer to Table 1-11 for the TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator specifi-
cations.
Table 1-11. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator, Specifications.
Physical
Size 82.8 mrn w x 82.8 rnm h x 190.5 mrn d (3.26 x 3.26 x 7.5 in); 3 ATI-S
Weight 1.45 kg (3.2 lb), rnax
Mounting May be either front or rear mounted, using either clamp or screw
fastening, per ARlNC 408
Mounting Rockwell Collins Part No
Mooring Plate (front/rear 553-6588-004
mount) 553-6593-003
Adapter plate (front mounting) 139-31 56-000
Clamp (front mounting)
Pneumatic connector MS33649-05 MIL-S-8879
(500-20 UNJF-3B)
Functional
Traffic Advisory Range 6 nmi forward, 3 nmi rearward; optional - 12 nrni forward, 6 nmi
rearward; up to 30 intruders
Vertical Speed -6000 to +6000 fpm
ARINC 429 ARINC 704 IRS high-speed (HS) bus ARlNC 706 ADC low-speed (LS)
bus
Analog ARINC 565 ac analog, 250 mV per 1000 fpm, phase-reversing 400 Hz;
ARINC 575 dc analog, 500 rnV per 1000 fpm, polarity-reversing dc
Pneumatic Input Static Air Pressure
Traffic and resolution advisory ARINC 429 HS bus (from TTR-920/TTR-921 and TTR-2100)
Discrete signals
Inputs Vertical speed source selection, VSI valid
Outputs TA/RA display status valid
Remote light sensor input 0 to 18 V dc, nominal, to control display brightness from 0 to 10 kftL
Electrical
Primary power Operating: 115 V ac, 400 Hz; 15 W Lighting: 0 to 5 V ac,
400 Hz Dimming: remote light sensor, 5-V lighting bus, or bezel-mounted
photocell
Power factor 0.39
Environmental Parameter DO-160 Environment
Temperature (low operating) DO-160
Temperature (low survival)
1-22
Table 1-11. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator, Specifications. - Continued
Temperature (short-time operating) A2F1 -20º C (-36 º F)
Temperature (high operating) A2 -55º C (-99º F)
Temperature (high survival) A2 +70º C (126º F)
Loss of Cooling Air A2 +85º C (153º F)
Altitude A2 +40º C (72º F)
Decompression A2 4572 m (1 5 000 ft)
Overpressure A2 16 764 m (55 000 ft)
Temperature Variation A2 -4572 m (-15 000 ft)
Humidity C 2 'C (3.6 'F)/min
Operational Shock B 95%, 10 cycles
Crash Safety, Impulse 6g, 11 ms
Crash Safety, Sustained 15g, 11 ms
Vibration 12g, 3s
Explosion PKS
Waterproofness E1
Fluids Susceptibility X No test
Sand and Dust X No test
Fungus Resistance X No test
Salt Spray X No test
Magnetic Effect X
Power Input Z
Voltage Spike E
Audio Freq Conducted Susceptibility A
Induced Signal Susceptibility E
Radio Frequency Susceptibility Z
Radio Frequency Emission Z
1-23
Table 1-11. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator, Specifications. - Continued
Lightning Z
Thermal Shock K
HIRF (AS 8034, sec 5.23)
Dielectric 50 V/m 50 V/m
(AS 8034, sec 5.24)
1.4.3.3. TTC-920( ) TCAS I I Transponder Control, Specifications. Refer to Table 1-12 for the TTC-920( ) for the TCAS II
Transponder Control Specifications.
Table 1-12. TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control, Specifications.
Physical
Size 57.2 mm h x 146.1 mm w x 127 mm d (2.25 x 5.75 x 5 in)
Weight 0.9 kg (2.0 Ib), max
Functional
Data ARINC 429 bus
Model Function Selection Discrete Signals
Electrical
Primary Power Operating: 115 V, 400 Hz, 8 W Lighting: 5 V ac, except TTC-920G
is 28 V dc
Power Factor 0.75
1-24
1.4.3.4. TRE-920 and TRE-920C TCAS II Directional Antennas. Refer to Table 1-13 for the TRE-920, and to Table 1-14
for the TRE-920C TCAS II Transponder Control, Specifications.
Table 1-13. TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna, Specifications.
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICAT1ON
Physical
Size 33.0 mrn h x 160.0 rnrn w x 284.5 rnm d (1.3 x 6.3 x 11.2 in)
Radius of mounting surface CPN 622-8973-001, -101, -011, none (flat)
CPN 622-8973-003, -103, 1.88 m (74 inches)
CPN 622-8973-002, -102, 2.06 m (81 inches)
CPN 622-8973-004, -104, 2.82 m (111 inches)
Mounting CPN 622-8973-0XX, (four holes)
CPN 622-8973-1XX, (eight holes)
Functional
Connectors Coaxial Type TNC (qty of 4)
1-25
Table 1-14. TRE-920C TCAS II Directional Antenna, Specifications.
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICAT1ON
Physical
Size 33.0 mrn h x 160.0 rnrn w x 284.5 rnm d (1.3 x 6.3 x 11.2 in)
Radius of mounting surface 1.27 rn (50.0 inches)
Mounting Uses Clamping Ring
Functional
Connectors Coaxial Type TNC (qty of 4)
1.4.3.5. TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder. Refer to Table 1-15 for the TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder specifications.
Table 1-15. TPR- 720 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications.
Physical
Size 194 mm h x 128.5 mm w x 324.1 mm d (7.6 x 5.1 x 12.8 in)
Weight 5.45 kg (12 lb), max
Cooling Convection; no forced air required
Functional
Reply Modes ATCRBS modes A and C, special identification pulse, mode S short and
long replies
Transmitter Output 1090 MHz; 250 to 631 W (54 to 58 dBm) per pulse
Electrical
Primary Power 11 5 V, 400 Hz; 42 W (nom), no interrogations; 50 W (nom), mode A;
49 W (nom), mode S
Power Factor 0.75
Environmental
Parameter DO-160B Catagory
Temperature and Altitude A2/D2
Temperature Variation B
Humidity A
Shock Test TEST
Vibration JY
Explosion X
Waterproofness X
Fluids Susceptibility X
Sand And Dust X
1-26
Table 1-15. TPR- 720 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications. - Continued
Fungus Resistance X
Salt Spray X
Magnetic Effect Z
Power Input A
Voltage Spike Conducted A
Audio Frequency Conduction Susceptibility E
Induced Signal Susceptibility A
RF Susceptibility (Rad And Cond) A
Emission of RF Energy A
1.4.3.6. TPR-900 ATC/Mode S Transponder. Refer to Table 1-16 for the TPR-900 ATC/Mode S Transponder specifications.
Table 1-16. TPR-900 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications.
Related documents
ARINC 71 8-4, 735, 407-1, 429-1 3, 565, 572-1, 575-3, 600-7, 604, 706-1
EUROCAE ED-I 2A, ED-I 4C, ED-43
FAA TSO C112
FAR Part 43 Appendix F: complies, upon successful completion of the
performance test given in the relative component maintenance manual
(refer to Table 1-18) within the preceding 24 calendar months.
FTZ 17TR2010
RTCA DO-160C, DO-178A, DO-181A Change 1, DO- 185, DO-203
Environmental
Parameter DO-160 Category
Temperature and altitude A2C4D1
(-40 to +70°C (-40 to +I58 OF))
(-13 719 to 45 732 m (-15 000 to 50 000 ft))
Loss of cooling V
Temperature variation B
Humidity A
Shock Crash safety (impulse): 1 shock of 15 g peak (11 ms)

Crash safety (sustained): test load of 12 g (3 s)
Vibration CLY
1-27
Table 1-16. TPR-900 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications. - Continued
Explosion X
Waterproofness X
Fluids susceptibility X
Sand and dust X
Fungus resistance X
Salt spray X
Magnetic effect Z
Power input E
Voltage spike A
Audio freq. conducted susceptibility E
Induced signal susceptibility Z
RF susceptibility U
Emission of RF energy Z
Lightning induced transient susceptibility K
Lightning direct effects X
Icing X
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Physical
Size 4 Modular Concept Unit (MCU), 193.5 mm (7.62 in) max high, 128.5
mm (5.06 in) max wide, 387.6 mm (15.26 in) max
Weight 12.5 Ib (5.68 kg) max
Cooling air Capable of operating with a loss of cooling air for a minimum of 30
minutes
Input Power (apparent power)
Standard Conditions
No Interrogations 42 Volt-Amperes (VA)
Mode A/C 50 VA
Mode S 49 VA
Operational Range 97 to 134 V ac at 400 ±40 Hz
Power Factor 0.61
Power Interrupt 200 ms, minimum (operation uninterrupted)
Electrical
Datalink Capability Comm A/B/C (level III), TCAS
Transmitter
Frequency 1090 ±0 MHz
1-28
Peak Power Output 250 to 631 watts, each pulse (at active antenna connector)
Load Impedance 50 ohms, nominal: max recommended Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) 1.5:l
ATCRBS reply characteristics Reply consists of two framing pulses, up to 13 information pulses, and an
optional SPI pulse.
Duration (50% amplitude) 0.45 ±0.10 μs

Rise time 10 to 90%) 0.05 to 0.1 μs
Decay time (90 to 10%) 0.05 to 0.2 μs
Pulse timing variation after first 0.15 μs, max
framing pulse
Mode S reply characteristics 4-pulse preamble, followed by data pulses.
Duration of preamble 0.50 ±0.05 μs

Duration of data 0.50 ±0.05 μs or 1 .00 ±0.05 μs
Rise time (10 to 90%) 0.1 μs max
Decay time (90 to 10%) 0.2 μs max
Pulse timing (relative to first
preamble pulse)
Second preamble 1.00 ±0.05 μs
Third preamble 3.50 ±0.05 μs
Fourth preamble 4.50 ±0.05 μs
First data 8.00 ±0.05 μs, or 8.50 ±0.05 μs
Data bit duration 1 0 μs, nominal
Data bit positions 1 0 μs intervals beginning 8 μs
after start of first preamble pulse
Data pulse definition
Logic 1 first half of bit
Logic 0 second half of bit
Data bits transmitted
Short reply 56 bits
Long reply 112 bits
Receiver
Frequency 1030 f0.2 MHz (less than 1 dB variation)
1-29
Sensitivity (at antenna ports) Minimum Triggering Level (MTL)Minimum triggering level for 90%
reply ratio:
-76 dBm k4 dB, ATCRBS/all call
-77 dBm f3 dB, mode S
Bandwidth Triggering signal below 1005 MHz and above 1055 MHz will exceed
level at 1030 MHz by at least 60 dB for same reply efficiency.
1.4.3.7. ATC/Mode S Transponder. Refer to Table 1-17 for the TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder specifications.
Table 1-17. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Specifications.
TPR-901 Related
Documents
ARINC 407-1, 429-13, 532D, 565, 572-1, 575-3, 600- 7, 600-10, 604-1, 607-2,
615-3, 702-6, 702A, 706-4, 718-4, 718A, 720-1, 735-2, 718A-4
EUROCAE ED-12A, ED-14D, ED-43, ED-73, ED-102A
FAA TSO C112A, TSO-C112e, TSO-C166b, ETSO-C112d, ETSO-C166b
FAR Part 43 Appendix F: complies upon successful completion of the
performance test given in the related component maintenance manual
Table 1-18 within the preceding 24 calendar months.
FTZ 17TR2010
RTCA DO-160D, DO-160E, DO-178B, DO-181, DO-181A Change 7, DO-181E,
DO-185, DO-203, DO-218, DO-260A, DO-260B
Environmental
Category DO-160D DO-160E
Temperature and S A2, D1
altitude -005: (A2)(C4)(D1) -205, -225:
[(A2)(C4)(D1)X]
Loss of cooling X X
Temperature variation X B
Humidity X B
Shock X B
Vibration X S, C, L, Y
-225:
[S(C)Z(R)]
Explosion X X
Waterproofness X X
1-30
Fluids susceptibility X X
Sand and dust X X
Fungus resistance X X
Salt spray X X
Magnetic effect Z (Paragraph 15.3) Z
Power input E (Section 16.0) A(CF)
-205, -225:
A(CF)X
Voltage spike A (Section 17.1) A
Audio freq. conducted E (Section 7.2.1) K(CF)
susceptibility
Induced signal Z (Sect. 19.3.1 and 19.3.4) Z, C
susceptibility
Radio frequency R RR
susceptibility -005: RRX
Emission of RF energy H H
Lightning induced transient susceptibility A3C3 (Section 22.5) (A3)(Z3)X
Lightning direct X X
effects
Icing X X
Electrostatic discharge A A
Fire, Flammability X
Physical
Size 4 MCU, 193.5 mm (7.62 in) max high,
128.5 mm (5.06 in) max wide, 387.6
mm (15.26 in) max
Weight 6.26 kg (13.8 lb) max
Cooling air Flow Rate 15.4 kg/hr
(34.0lb/hr).(Forced Air not required
but recommended)
Input power (apparent
power)
Standard conditions
No interrogations 42 VA
Mode A/C 50 VA
Mode S 49 VA
Operational range 97 to 134 V ac at 400 ±40 Hz
1-31
Power factor 0.95
Power interrupt 200 ms, minimum (operation uninterrupted)
Electrical
Data link capability Comm A/B/C (level III), TCAS
Transmitter
Frequency 1090 ±l.0 MHz
Peak power output 250 to 631 watts, each pulse (at active antenna
connector)
Load impedance 50 ohms, nominal: max recommended VSWR 1.51
ATCRBS reply Reply consists of two framing pulses, up to 13 information pulses, and an
characteristics optional SPI pulse.
Duration (50% amplitude) 0.45 ±0.10 μs
Rise time (10 to 90%) 0.05 to 0.1 μs

Decay time (90 to 10%) 0.05 to 0.2 μs
Pulse timing variation after first 0.15 μs, max
framing pulse
1-32
Mode S reply characteristics 4-pulse preamble, followed by data pulses.
Duration of preamble
Duration of data 0.50 ±0.05 μs, or 1.00 ±0.05 μs
Rise time (10 to 90%) 0.1 μs max
Decay time (90 to 10%) 0.2 μs max
Pulse timing (relative to first preamble
pulse)
Second preamble 1 .00 ±0.05 μs
Third preamble 3.50 ±0.05 μs
Fourth preamble 4.50 ±0.05 μs
First data 8.00 ±0.05 μs or 8.50 ±0.05 μs
Data bit duration 1 .0 μs, nominal
Data bit positions 1 .0 μs intervals
Data pulse definition
Logic 1 first half of bit
Logic 0 second half of bit
Data bits transmitted
Short reply 56 bits
Long reply 112 bits
Receiver
Frequency 1030 f0.2 MHz (less than 1 dB variation)
Sensitivity (at antenna Minimum triggering level for 90% reply ratio
ports) -76 dBm + 4 dB, ATCRBS/all call
-77 dBm + 3 dB, mode S
Bandwidth Triggering signal below 1005 MHz and above 1055 MHz will exceed
level at 1030 MHz by at least 60 dB for same reply efficiency.
1.5. RELATED PUBLICATIONS.

Table 1-18 lists the publications related to the operation of the TCAS II.
1-33
Table 1-18. Related Publications.
PUBLICATION TITLE ATA ROCKWELL

NUM- COLLINS PART
BER NUMBER
TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder Component Maintenance Manual 34-50-74 523-0775038
TTC-920( ) TTC-920 TCAS Transponder Control Component Maintenance Manual 34-40-76 523-0776123
TTR-920 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver and TRE-920 TCAS Antenna Component 34-40-71 523-0776052
Maintenance Manual, TTR-920, Volume 1
Maintenance Manual, TTR-920, Volume 2
Maintenance Manual, TTR-920 (CPN 622-8971 -X20), Volume 1
Maintenance Manual, TTR-920 (CPN 622-8971 -X20), Volume 2
Maintenance Manual, TTR-920 (CPN 622-8971 -500, - 700), Volume 1
Maintenance Manual, TTR-920 (CPN 622-8971 -500, - 700), Volume 2
TTR-921 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver and TRE-920 ( ) / TRE-930 TCAS Antenna 34-40-69 523-0810647
TTR-921 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver and TRE-920( )/TRE-930 TCAS Antenna Component 34-40-48 523-0810647
Maintenance Manual, with IPL
TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder, with IPL 34-50-97 523-0810638
TPR-900 ATC/Mode S Transponder Component Maintenance Manual 34-50-92 523-0776924
TVI-920/920D Vertical Speed/TCAS Indicator Component Maintenance Manual 34-40-75 523-0776112
WXR-700X Weather Radar System Installation Manual 34-45-20 523-0769561
WXI-711 Radar/TCAS Indicator Component Maintenance Manual 34-45-42 523-0776158
Avionics Standard Shop Practices Instruction Book none 523-0768039
General Aviation Antennas Instruction Book none 523-0769091
TTR-2100 TCAS Transmitter/Receiver Component Maintenance Manual 34-40-49 523-0819888
1-34
523-0820642
CHAPTER 2
Installation
2.1. INTRODUCTION.
NOTE
The information and instructions provided in this chapter are recommendations and do not necessarily correspond
with any actual aircraft installation and wiring. This chapter cannot be used in place of a Supplemental Type
Certificate (STC) or Type Certificate (TC).
This chapter provides information for the installation of the Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) II. Procedures must be
performed as described below to be sure of proper operation and performance.
2.2. UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT.

If equipment is detected to be damaged while in shipment, claims should be filed with the transportation company involved. If
claims for damage are to be filed, save the original shipping container and materials. If no damage can be detected, replace packing
materials in the shipping container and save for future use (for example, storage or reshipment). Perform a visual inspection of the
system, subsystem, or unit and inspect for the following concerns:
• Look for any damage or corrosion
• Make sure all parts are intact and in working order
• Check all connectors for any damage, corrosion and broken or bent pins.
2.3. PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK.
REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE TCAS II BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING IT. TO
INSTALL OR REMOVE THE TCAS II, OR ANY PARTS OF IT WITHOUT FIRST REMOVING ALL ELEC-
TRICAL POWER CAN DAMAGE IT.
Prior to installation of any/all TCAS II equipment into an aircraft, make sure the system or equipment to be interfacing with TCAS
II equipment is operating properly and all applicable tests have been performed. Refer to the latest revision of the component main-
tenance manual or illustrated parts list to perform testing of the unit. In the absence of either of those documents, the acceptance test
procedure for the panel variant should be used to perform testing of the unit.
2.3.1. Cabling Precautions.
IF AIRCRAFT POWER IS 115 V AC, THE DC POWER PINS LBP-3 AND -10 MUST BE LEFT OPEN. IF
AIRCRAFT POWER IS 28 V DC, THE AC POWER PINS LBP-1 AND LBP-7 MUST BE LEFT OPEN. TO
NOT OBSERVE THIS CAUTION CAN CAUSE HARM TO TCAS II AVIONIC EQUIPMENT. THIS DOES
NOT APPLY TO THE TTR-2100.
Observe the following precautions while preparing the interconnect wiring cables:
• Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electrical system such as generators and ignition systems
2-1
Installation 523-0820642
• Keep connecting cables away from heavy, current-carrying circuits, pulse-transmitting equipment, and interference sources
• Make all external connections to the system equipment through designated connectors
• Suitable wire should be used in accordance with applicable specifications
• Leave slack in cables to allow free movement of equipment, and to keep wires from breaking
• Connect primary power to indicated components through airframe circuit breakers of the sizes shown in applicable figures
• Provide separate Alternating Current (AC) and Direct Current (DC) grounds - DC grounds may be individual local grounds
• All remaining connecting wires should be #24 American Wire Gauge (AWG) or larger - Teflon insulated wire is recommended
• For all wires indicated as twisted and shielded, make shield grounds at the electronics rack shelf-interconnect points and at pro-
duction breaks
• Refer to notes in the interconnect wiring diagrams for other installation recommendations/requirements
• Properly segregate the interconnecting wires. In some aircraft types, the TCAS II system interfaces with other equipment that is
part of flight-critical systems, such as an autoland system. These interfaces must comply with the wiring segregation requirements
of those systems. It is recommended that the installer contact the aircraft manufacturer for specific requirements.
Use connection wires as follows for 115 V ac (hot) and 115 V ac (common), unless otherwise noted: Refer to Table 2-1.
Table 2-1. Connection-Wire Recommendations.
AWG MAXIMUM LENGTH RECOMMENDED TYPE

#22 7.62 m (25.0 ft) Teflon Insulated
Use #16 AWG or larger connection wires for 28 V dc power and return wires.
2.3.2. Aircraft Preparation.

The following are general guidelines for wiring segregation.
• If the TCAS II installation requires the relocation of existing equipment, equipment forming a multiple-channel redundant system
should be installed on different equipment racks or shelves. The TCAS II system, including the ATC/mode S transponders, is not
considered a multiple-channel redundant system and the units do not require installation on different racks or shelves
• Interconnect wiring for each channel of a multiple-channel redundant aircraft system should be routed in separate wire bundles
• Wire bundles for each channel of a multiple-channel redundant aircraft system should be routed in the aircraft to avoid any ex-
posure to single-fault external forces that could cause simultaneous destruction of the wire bundle
• Segregated wire bundles should be routed through separate connectors in the aircraft interconnect. If this is not possible, then
signal separation should be maintained by contact selection in the connector. Similarly, isolation should be maintained between
pins to prevent shorts. Pins used to create segregation zone boundaries should be connected to power sources or to ground
• Separation should be maintained in junction boxes, terminal strips, and similar aircraft wiring interconnection points
• Critical, active-low, analog discretes should be isolated from each other and other similar aircraft signals throughout the aircraft
interconnect, junction boxes, terminal strips, and similar aircraft wiring. (Active-low discretes are discretes for which the pres-
ence of a ground indicates the function is active or valid.)
2.3.2.1. Wiring Diagrams. Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6, Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8, and
Figure 2-9 are interconnect wiring diagrams showing component-to-system connections, including the use of various transponders
with the TCAS II system, as listed below. Figure 2-4 is a simplified schematic drawing showing interconnections between the
transponders and two or four omnidirectional antennas. Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 are simplified interconnects of the transponder to
Gillham altitude encoder interface.
2-2
2.3.2.1.1. Refer to Figure 2-1, sheet 6. Note 25 only applies to the TTR-90 and TTR-921. The TTR-2100 does not currently
support this RADIO ALTIMETER pin input.
2.3.2.1.2. Refer to Figure 2-1, sheet 7. Notes 32, 35, and 40 only apply to the TTR-920 and TTR-921. For notes 32 and 40, the
TTR-2100 does not currently support the MAG HEADING and the ANALOG RADIO ALTIMETER pin inputs. For note 35, the
TTR-2100 is also AC powered, so the DC power pins are not populated.
2-3/(2-4 Blank)
Figure 2-1. TTR-920/-921/-2100 Interconnect Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 7)
Change 1 2-5/(2-6 Blank)



2-11/(2-12 Blank)
2-13/(2-14 Blank)


Figure 2-2. TRE-920( )/TTR-920/-921/-2100 Antenna Interconnect Diagram
2-19/(2-20 Blank)
Figure 2-3. Dual TVI-920 Interconnect Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)
2-21/(2-22 Blank)
2-23/(2-24 Blank)
2-25/(2-26 Blank)
Figure 2-4. Dual Transponder Antenna Installation Diagram
2-27/(2-28 Blank)
Figure 2-5. TPR-720 Using Gillham Altitude Encoding, Simplified Interconnect Wiring Diagram
2-29/(2-30 Blank)
Figure 2-6. TPR-720 and ATCRBS Transponders Using Gillham Altitude Encoding, Simplified Interconnect Wiring Diagram
2-31/(2-32 Blank)
Figure 2-7. Dual TPR-720 Interconnect Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 7)
2-33/(2-34 Blank)
2-35/(2-36 Blank)
2-37/(2-38 Blank)
2-39/(2-40 Blank)
2-41/(2-42 Blank)
2-43/(2-44 Blank)
2-45/(2-46 Blank)
Figure 2-8. TPR-720 and 621A-6/6A Interconnect Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 6)
2-47/(2-48 Blank)
2-49/(2-50 Blank)
2-51/(2-52 Blank)
2-53/(2-54 Blank)
2-55/(2-56 Blank)
2-57/(2-58 Blank)
Figure 2-9. TPR-720 and 621A-3 Interconnect Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 6)
2-59/(2-60 Blank)
2-61/(2-62 Blank)
2-63/(2-64 Blank)
2-65/(2-66 Blank)
2-67/(2-68 Blank)
2-69/(2-70 Blank)
2.3.3. TCAS II System, Mating Connectors.

Refer to Table 2-2 for a listing of TCAS II System, Mating Connectors.
Table 2-2. TCAS II System, Mating Connectors.
UNIT VENDOR PART NUMBER

ITT CANNON AMP
(Numbers in brackets refer to notes at the end
of this table.)
TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-
Receiver
Aeronautical Radi, INCorporated (ARINC) BKAD3-67404-56 44571 7-5
600, size 3 shell (alodine)
ARINC 600, size 3 shell (nickel) BKAD3-67404-105
Connector, circular (TTR-921 only) KPT06B-14-19P PT06A14-19P(SR)
Modified Size 1 coax (RG-214/U) 349-1 043-000 446549-3
349-1046-000 [1]
Size 5 coax, solder cup 249-2080-000 225791-5
Insert socket, 12-gage crimp 031 -1308-000 208273-2
Insert pin, 20-gage crimp 031 -1302-000 208267-2
Insert pin, 22-gage crimp 030-2259-000 208262-3
TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder
ARINC 600, size 2 shell BKAD2-155-301 -FO [3]
BKAD2-155M-301 -FO [4] (208972-2) [4]
Standard Size 1 coax (RG-214IU 249-51 23-000 [3]
349-1 043-000
349-1046-000 [I]
Size 5 coax, solder cup 249-2080-000 225791 -5
Insert socket, 12-gage crimp 031-1308-000 208273-2
Insert socket, 16-gage crimp 031-1303-000 208270-2
TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder
ARINC 600, size 2 shell BKAD2-67402-231
BKAD2-67402/237 [6]
Connector, circular (TPR-901 only) KPT06B-14-19P PTO6A1 4-1 9P(SR)
Size 1 coax (RG-214/U) 349-1053-003 [4] 446549-3
349-1053-002 [4] [5]
2-71
Table 2-2. TCAS II System, Mating Connectors. - Continued
UNIT VENDOR PART NUMBER

ITT CANNON AMP
Size 5 coax, solder cup 249-2080-000 225791 -5
Insert pin, 20-gage crimp 031 -1302-000 208267-2
TTC-920 TCAS II Transponder Control
J1 connector, crimp MS24266R16B24S7 Collins Part Number (CPN)
359-4095-690
Contacts MS24254-20P CPN 359-0006-000
J2 connector, crimp MS24266R16B24S8 CPN 359-4095-700
Contacts MS24254-20P CPN 359-0006-000
TTC-920A TCAS II Transponder Control
J1 connector, crimp MS24266R16B24S7 CPN 359-4095-690
Contacts MS24254-20P CPN 359-0006-000
J2 connector, crimp MS24266R20B41 SN CPN 859-1 002-010
Contacts MS3193A20-20A CPN 359-0032-020
TRE-920( ) TCAS II Directional Antenna
Jl/J2/J31J4 connector 24P 153-1 CPN 357-7204-01 0[2]
TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator
J1 connector MS83723/75R2041 N CPN 359-4131 -080
NOTE
[1] Modified size for use with ECS-311202 coaxial cable.
[2] Specialty connector type number.
[3] Not interchangeable with contacts made by other manufacturers or contacts modified to be interchangeable with other
manufacturers (see note [4]).
[4] Modified to be interchangeable with contact made by other manufacturers but not compatible with non-modified contacts
(See note [3]).
[5] Standard Size 1 coax contact for use with ECS-311202 coaxial cable.
[6] Size 2 Shell with Grounding Fingers.
2.3.4. Function Selection Pins.

Refer to Figure 2-10 for a listing of rear connector pins and functions for the components comprising the TCAS II system. Sheets
five and six show the pin layout of ARINC 718-4 and ARINC 718A transponders, and defines their pin functions. ARINC 718A-4
transponder installations have the same pin layout, but refer to Table 2-3 for definitions of their pin functions. Function selection
pins are described in the paragraphs that follow.
2-72
Figure 2-10. TCAS II, Component Rear Connector Pin Functions (Sheet 1 of 6)
2-73/(2-74 Blank)
2-75/(2-76 Blank)
2-77/(2-78 Blank)
2-79/(2-80 Blank)
2-81/(2-82 Blank)
2-83/(2-84 Blank)
Table 2-3. ARINC 718A-4 Transponder Plug Pin Definitions
TOP PLUG (TP) MIDDLE PLUG (MP) BOTTOM PLUG (BP)

PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
1A Aircraft / Vehicle 1A Mode S address – A1 1 115 V Primary Power Hot AC
Length/Width, MSB Power
1B Aircraft / Vehicle 1B Mode S address – A2 2 Backward Incompatibility
Length/Width Discrete
1C Aircraft / Vehicle 1C Mode S address – A3 3 Reserved +28 V dc Return
Length/Width, LSB
1D GPS Antenna Longitudinal 1D Mode S address – A4 4 FMC Source Select
Offset, MSB
1E GPS Antenna Longitudinal 1E Mode S address – A5 5 NIC/NACv Limiting
Offset
1F GPS Antenna Longitudinal 1F Mode S address – A6 6 SPARE
Offset, LSB
1G Navigation Accuracy 1G Mode S address – A7 7 115 V ac Primary Power Cold
Category_Velocity (NACv)
Encoding
1H System Design Assurance 1H Mode S address – A8 8 Signal Ground
(SDA) Encoding
1J GPS Time Mark #2 (Off-side), 1J Mode S address – A9 9 SPARE
(A)
1K GPS Time Mark #2 (Off-side), 1K Mode S address – A10 10 Reserved +28 V dc
(B) (use with MP-4C/MP-4D
data only.
2A FMC/GNSS #1 IN (A) 2A Mode S address – A11 11 Common Return to Chassis
2B FMC/GNSS #1 IN (B) 2B Mode S address – A12 12 Mutual Suppression
2C IRS/FMS #1 IN (A) 2C Mode S address – A13 13 Mutual Suppression (for Daisy
Chaining)
2D IRS/FMS #1 IN (B) 2D Mode S address – A14
2E General Data #1 OUT (A) 2E Mode S address – A15
2F General Data #1 OUT (B) 2F Mode S address – A16
2G SPARE 2G Mode S address – A17
2H SPARE 2H Mode S address – A18
2J SPARE 2J Mode S address – A19
2K ADS-B Function Fail 2K Mode S address – A20
Declaration selection.
3A ADS-B OUT Fail Discrete 3A Mode S address – A21
Output
3B XPDR Fail Discrete #2 and as 3B Mode S address – A22
Strobe Discrete
2-85
Table 2-3. ARINC 718A-4 Transponder Plug Pin Definitions - Continued

3C Cable Delay Program 3C Mode S address – A23
3D Cable Delay Program, Delay 3D Mode S address – A24
Time, MSB
3E Cable Delay Program, Delay 3E Discrete Input / Common
Time, LSB
3F Common Ground 3F FCC/MCP #1 IN (A)
3G Source Destination Identifier 3G FCC/MCP #1 IN (B)
Encoding, MSB
3H Source Destination Identifier 3H Functional Test IN
Encoding, LSB
3J Discrete Input / Common 3J RESERVED
3K SPARE / Common 3K XPDR Fail Discrete #1
4A Synchro Altitude #1 Altitude 4A FMC Gen #2 IN (A)
X, coarse
4B Synchro Altitude #1 Altitude 4B FMC Gen #2 IN (B)
Y, coarse
4C Synchro Altitude #1 Altitude 4C FMC/GNSS #2 IN (A)
Z, coarse
4D Synchro Altitude #1 Ref H 4D FMC/GNSS #2 IN (B)
4E Synchro Altitude #1 Ref L 4E Aircraft Category, MSB
4F Synchro Altitude #1 Altitude 4F Aircraft Category, LSB
X, fine
4G Synchro Altitude #1 Altitude 4G ADS-B Configuration Parity
Y, fine
4H Synchro Altitude #1 Altitude 4H 1090MHz ADS-B Receive
Z, fine Capability
4J Synchro Altitude #1 Flag 4J FCC/MCP #2 IN (A)
4K SPARE 4K FCC/MCP #2 IN (B)
5A Maximum Cruising Airspeed 5A Air Data #2 IN (A)
Capability, MSB
5B Maximum Cruising Airspeed 5B Air Data #2 IN (B)
Capability
5C Maximum Cruising Airspeed 5C IRS/FMS #2 IN (A)
Capability, LSB
5D Common return path for top 5D IRS/FMS #2 IN (B)
plug programming pins
5E TCAS to Transponder (TX) 5E ADLP OUT (A)
Coordination Input (A)
2-86

5F TCAS to Transponder (TX) 5F ADLP OUT (B)
Coordination Input (B)
5G Transponder to TCAS (XT) 5G Extended Squitter Inhibit (per
Coordination Output (A) ARINC718A-4)
5H Transponder to TCAS (XT) 5H ADLP Enable
Coordination Output (B)
5J Aircraft Air/ground status #2 5J Antenna BITE Monitoring
5K Aircraft Air/Ground status #1 5K IRS/FMS 1 or 2 Select
6A FMC Gen #1 IN (A) 6A Maintenance Data IN (A)
6B FMC Gen #1 IN (B) 6B Maintenance Data IN (B)
6C SPARE 6C Maintenance Data OUT (A)
6D GPS Time Mark #1 (On-Side) 6D Maintenance Data OUT (B)
(A)
6E GPS Time Mark #1 (On-Side) 6E Air Data Altitude Source
(B) Select
6F SPARE 6F Air Data Altitude Type
Selection, MSB
6G SPARE 6G Air Data Altitude Type
Selection, LSB
6H SPARE 6H Common path for middle plug
programming pins
6J SPARE 6J NOT USED
6K Single Antenna Program 6K Spare / Common
7A Control data "A" or FCC/MCP 7A Synchro Altitude #2 Altitude
#1 IN (A) X, coarse
7B Control data "A" or FCC/MCP 7B Synchro Altitude #2 Altitude
#1 IN (B) Y, coarse
7C SPARE 7C Synchro Altitude #2 Altitude
Z, coarse
7D Source selection, control input 7D Synchro Altitude #2 Ref H
from either Control data port
"A" or "B"
7E Control Data "B" IN (A) 7E Synchro Altitude #2 Ref L
7F Control Data "B" IN (B) 7F Synchro Altitude #2 Altitude
X, fine
7G Standby or On IN 7G Synchro Altitude #2 Altitude
Y, fine
2-87

7H Air Data #1 IN 7H Synchro Altitude #2 Altitude
Z, fine
7J Air Data #1 IN 7J Synchro Altitude #2 Flag
7K FCC/MCP Source Select 7K NOT USED
COAX TOP ANTENNA COAX BOTTOM ANTENNA
2.3.4.1. TPR-720/900/901 Transponder - Altitude Source.
NOTE
The DO-260B TPR-901 transponder (822-1338-205 and -225) is not capable of Gillham altitude-encoded data.
TCAS requires use of the most accurate altitude source available on the aircraft. The TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder
is compatible with four types of altitude information: ARINC 429 digital data, ARINC 575 digital data, coarse/fine synchro data,
and Gillham altitude-encoded data. The specific type used is programmed into the TPR-720 by the altitude type select program pins,
MP-6F, MP-6G, and MP-6H (refer to Paragraph 2.3.5.1.18).
2.3.4.1.1. If available, two sources of altitude data (ARINC 429 digital data, and ARINC 575 digital data or coarse/fine synchro
data) may be interfaced with the TPR-720/-900/- 901, with the source to be used selected with a control panel or flight-deck-mounted
Alternate Air Data Source Select switch. Where only one source of altitude data is used, it may be connected to input number 1 or
input number 2. When connected to input number 2, alternate air data source select input, connector pin MP-6E, must be connected
to dc ground.
2.3.4.1.2. For TCAS installations, two independent sources of Gillham altitude-encoded data are required to provide the ability to
monitor the altitude signal in the TPR-720/- 900/-901. In such installations, the altitude comparison on/off control connector pin,
MP-5G, must be connected to dc ground to enable the altitude comparator. The Gillham altitude source is selected by a control
panel or flight deck mounted Alternate Air Data Source Select switch. Refer to Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7 recommended aircraft
interconnect wiring diagrams.
2.3.4.2. TPR-901 Transponder.
NOTE
BP-2 must be grounded for ARINC 718A capable units to select 718A configuration.
FMC 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A Configurations Only): TP-3A is open to select FMC#1/Gen In#1 port, or grounded
to select FMC#2/Gen In #2 port. TP-3A is ADS-B OUT Fail Discrete Out for ARINC 718A-4 822-1338-205/225
TPR-901.
For FMC/GNSS 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A 822-1338-004 Configurations Only): TP-3J is open to select
FMC/GNSS 1 port and GPS/GNSS #1 or grounded to select FMC/GNSS 2 port and GPS/GNSS #2.
FCC/MCP 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A and ARINC718A-4 Configurations Only): TP-7K is open to select FCC/MCP
1 port, or grounded to select FCC/MCP 2 port.
IRS 1/2 Select(ARINC 718A and ARINC718A-4 Configurations Only): MP-5K is open to select IRS 1 port, or
grounded to select IRS 2 port.
MSP/ATSU/CMU1/2 Select (future use for ARINC 718A Configurations Only): MP-6K is open to select
MSP/ATSU/CMU 1 port, or grounded to select MSP/ATSU/CMU 2 port.
• FMC 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A Configurations Only) TP-3A is open to select FMC#1/Gen In#1 port or grounded to select
FMC#2/Gen In #2 port
2-88
• FMC/GNSS 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A Configurations Only)

• TP-3J is open to select FMC/GNSS 1 port and GPS/GNSS #1 or grounded to select FMC/GNSS 2 port and GPS/GNSS #2
• FCC/MCP 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A Configurations Only) TP-7K is open to select FCC/MCP 1 port or grounded to select
FCC/MCP 2 port
• IRS 1/2 Select (ARINC 718A Configurations Only) MP-5K is open to select IRS 1 port or grounded to select IRS 2 port
• MSP/ATSU/CMU 1/2 Select (future use for ARINC 718A Configurations Only) MP-6K is open to select MSP/ATSU/CMU 1
port or grounded to select MSP/ATSU/CMU 2 port.
2.3.5. Program Pins Selection and Strapping.

Program pins selection and strapping are described in the paragraphs that follow.
2.3.5.1. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver - Aircraft Altitude Limit . (Refer also to Paragraph 2.3.5.1.2.)
The following program pins are for selecting the can’t climb altitude, in 2000-foot increments. If no jumpers are installed, the altitude
will be zero feet. The limit set by the pins represent the worst-case condition. Refer to Figure 2-2 for TTR-920/-921/-2100 Antenna
interface diagram.
2.3.5.1.1. Select the program pin, or combination of pins, that indicates the altitude above which the aircraft cannot climb. Strap
the pin(s) to RMP-6K.
Alt Limit Strap RMP 6K To:

2000 ft RMP-6E
4000 ft RMP-6F
8000 ft RMP-6G
16 000 ft RMP-6H
32 000 ft RMP-6J
2.3.5.1.2. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver - Performance Limit Discrete. The input signal on pin
RMP-6D is from an external component, such as a flight management computer, which can determine that the aircraft cannot
achieve a 1500 fpm climb rate. When the signal is at electrical ground, the performance is not limited. When the input is open, the
climb is limited when the aircraft altitude is above the value set by pins RMP-6E through -6J. Refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6
for recommended aircraft interconnect wiring diagrams.
2.3.5.1.3. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver - TA Display Intruder Limit Program. This strapping indi-
cates the maximum number of intruder symbols that can be simultaneously displayed on the most limited traffic advisory display.
The pins for a selected value are left open. The pins not selected are connected to RBP-7K. The following are examples of strappings.
Refer to Table 2-4.
2-89
Table 2-4. Maximum Number of Intruder Symbols that can be Simultaneously Displayed.
BINARY VALUE
16 8 4 2 1
MAX NO. RBP-8F -8G -8H -8J -8K
SYMBOLS
TO BE DIS-
PLAYED
30 O O O O X
17 O X X X O
12 X O O X X
7 X X O O O
3 X X X O O
(X = GROUND, O = OPEN)
2.3.5.1.4. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Ground Display Mode. The ground display mode program pin will cause the sys-
tem to either show traffic or be placed in standby when the aircraft is on the ground, as indicated by the signal at air/ground logic
pin RMP-5K.
2.3.5.1.4.1. To show traffic when the aircraft is on the ground: RBP-7E is open.
2.3.5.1.4.2. To automatically place the TTR-920/-921/-2100 in standby when the aircraft is on the ground: RBP-7E is strapped to
RBP-7K.
2.3.5.1.5. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Display All-Traffic/Threat Traffic. This pin determines whether the TA indicator
displays traffic all the time or only when Traffic Advisory (TA) and Resolution Advisory (RA) are present. Check the display doc-
umentation to verify that this function is supported.
2.3.5.1.5.1. To display all-traffic: RBP-7F is open.
2.3.5.1.5.2. To display traffic only when traffic and resolution advisories occur: RBP-7F is strapped to ground.
2.3.5.1.5.3. If the transponder/TCAS control panel or the traffic indicator has a mode select switch (MI on TVI-920, TFC on
TTC-920( ) and WXI-711), this input should be left open.
2.3.5.1.6. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Advisory Inhibit Discrete. Grounding any of the pins provides the transmitter-
receiver with a command to inhibit TA/RA operation during other hazardous conditions. Refer to Table 2-5.
Table 2-5. Pin Inhibit TA/RA Operation.
Pin Inhibit Number Function

RBP-5 1 Switches TTR-920/-921/-2100 to standby mode
RBP-5 2 Switches TTR-920/-921/-2100 to TA ONLY mode
Input 1 has precedence over inputs 2, 3 and 4.
An open on all these pins indicates TA/RA operation.
2-90
2.3.5.1.7. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Cable Delay. These pins program the amount of delay differential between the top
and bottom TCAS antenna cables.
2.3.5.1.7.1. If the delay is to be added to the bottom antenna cable, connect RBP-7G to program pin common, RBP-7K. If the
delay is to be added to the top antenna cable, leave RBP-7G open.
2.3.5.1.7.2. The delay is the round-trip delay. This is determined by multiplying twice the cable length (in feet) by the character-
istic delay (in nanoseconds/foot) of the cable. A typical characteristic delay is 1.54 Ns/ft.
2.3.5.1.7.3. Once the difference in delay between the top and bottom antenna cables is determined, strap RBP-7H and RBP-7J in
the configuration whose range includes the determined delay time, according to the following:
STRAPPING DELAY
RBP- DIFFERENCE
7H 7J RANGE (Ns)
0 0 0 - 50
0 1 51 - 150
1 0 151 - 250
1 1 251 - 350
0 = pin open, 1 = pin strapped to RBP-7K
2.3.5.1.7.4. Sample delay differential calculation and strapping determination:
Sample delay differential calculation and strapping determination:

Assume the top cable length is 75 feet.
Assume the bottom cable length is 25 feet.
The delay will have to be added to the (shorter) bottom antenna. To do this, strap RBP-7G to RBP-7K.
Calculate the delay:
Determine the difference in cable lengths.
75 ft - 25 ft = 50 ft.
Determine the cable delay. (The example assumes 1.54 Ns/ft.)
50 ft x 2 [round trip distance] x 1.54 = 154 Ns.
Select and strap the program pins in the configuration whose range covers this time delay. (Refer to Paragraph 2.3.5.1.7.3)
Range is within 151 to 250 Ns delay. Strap RPB-7H to RBP-7K; leave RBP-7J open.
2.3.5.1.8. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Aural Advisory Discrete Outputs. The aural advisory discrete outputs provide a
ground to indicate the presence of a corrective, preventive, or traffic advisory. Only one output will be active at a time, the one of
higher priority displacing all others. The ground state is defined as a resistance of less than 10 ohms or a voltage of 0 to +3.5 V dc.
The open state is defined as a resistance of more than 100K ohms or a voltage of 18.5 to 36 V dc. The maximum current flow for
the aural advisory discretes is 20 ma.
2.3.5.1.9. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Antenna Insertion Loss. This input programs the amount of insertion loss in the
top and bottom directional and omnidirectional antenna cables. Top and bottom insertion loss is programmed individually. Connect
the appropriate pins to program pin common, RBP-7K, to select the antenna insertion loss. Refer to Table 2-6.
2-91
Table 2-6. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Antenna Insertion Loss.
Measured Top Antenna Bottom Antenna

Insertion Loss (dB) RMP-10B RMP-10A RMP-10D RMP-10C
0 to 1.0 0 1 0 1
1.0 to 2.0 1 0 1 0
2.0 to 3.0 0 0 0 0
3.0 to 4.0 (See note) 1 1 1 1
0 = open; 1 = connect to program pin common
NOTE
Row 3.0 to 4.0 only applies to the TTR-920.
2.3.5.1.10. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Audio Level Programming. These pins are used to program the audio signal
output level of both the high and low-level audio outputs. Connect the appropriate pin(s) to program pin common, RBP-7K, for the
desired audio level. Refer to Table 2-7.
Table 2-7. Pins used to Program the Audio Signal Output Level.
Airborne Audio Level
RBP- Low Level High Level

7A 7B 7C mW Decibel(s) W dBW
referenced to
1 milliwatt
(dBm)
0 0 0 40.0 16 4.0 6
0 0 1 20.0 13 2.0 3
0 1 0 10.0 10 1.0 0
0 1 1 5.0 7 0.5 -3
1 0 0 .25 4 0.25 -6
1 0 1 1.25 1 0.125 -9
1 1 0 0.625 -2 0.0625 -12
1 1 1 80 19 8.0 9
Ground Audio Level
8A 8B 8C mW dBm W dBW
0 0 0 40.0 16 4.0 6
0 0 1 20.0 13 2.0 3
0 1 0 10.0 10 1.0 0
0 1 1 5.0 7 0.5 -3
1 0 0 .25 4 0.25 -6
2-92
Table 2-7. Pins used to Program the Audio Signal Output Level. - Continued
Airborne Audio Level
RBP- Low Level High Level

7A 7B 7C mW Decibel(s) W dBW
referenced to
1 milliwatt
(dBm)
1 0 1 1.25 1 0.125 -9
1 1 0 0.625 -2 0.0625 -12
1 1 1 80 19 8.0 9
NOTE
Pins 8A, 8B, and 8C are active only in the TTR-921 and TTR-2100. No equivalent to these pins exists in the TTR-920.
0 = open; 1 = connect to program pin common.
2.3.5.1.11. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Self-Test Inhibit. This input provides a means to inhibit TCAS self-test when the
aircraft is airborne.
2.3.5.1.11.1. To allow TCAS self-test to be enabled when the aircraft is airborne: RBP-8E is open.
2.3.5.1.11.2. To inhibit TCAS self-test when the aircraft is airborne: RBP-8E is strapped to RBP-7K.
2.3.5.1.12. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Climb Inhibit Nos 1, 2, 3, and 4. These inputs are provided to indicate to the
TCAS when the aircraft’s climb performance is limited. The 1500 fpm climb-inhibit function occurs when inputs No 1 (RMP-1 J)
and No 2 (RMP-I3G), or inputs No. 3 (RBP-5J) and No. 4 (RBP-5K) are at ground (valid, or true). A climb inhibit can be generated
from a single source by wiring two inputs together (for example, No. 1 and No. 2). These inputs should be left open if the function
is not required.
2.3.5.1.13. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - Increased Climb Inhibit Nos 1, 2, 3, and 4. These inputs are provided to indicate
to the TCAS when the aircraft’s increased climb performance is limited. The 2500 fpm climb-inhibit function occurs when inputs
No. 1 (RBP-5E) and No. 2 (RBP-SF), or inputs No. 3 (RBP-5G) and No. 4 (RBP-5H) are at ground (valid, or true). An increased
climb inhibit can be generated from a single source by wiring two inputs together (for example, No. 1 and No.2). These inputs
should be left open if the function is not required.
2.3.5.1.14. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - RA Valid Discrete Disable. This input provides a means of disabling the mon-
itoring of the RA Display No 1 and No 2 Status In signals (RMP-14C and RMP-I3E, respectively) in installations where the RA
indicator does not provide this discrete output.
2.3.5.1.14.1. To enable the RA monitoring function: RBP-4G is open.
2.3.5.1.14.2. To inhibit the RA monitoring function: RBP-4G is strapped to RBP-7K.
2.3.5.1.15. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II - T R E -920/TRE -92OC Antenna SeIect. This input indicates to the TTR-920
whether the TRE-920 or the TRE-920C directional antenna is being used in the TCAS installation. TTR-921/-2100 do not require
antenna select.
2.3.5.1.15.1. To select operation with the TRE-920 antenna: RBP-8D is open.
2.3.5.1.15.2. To select operation with the TRE-920C antenna: RBP-8D is strapped to RBP-7K.
2.3.5.1.16. TVI-920 TCAS II VSl/RA/TA Indicator - Vertical Speed Data Inputs. The vertical speed indicating function of
the TVI-920 derives information from one of five sources: pneumatic, ARINC 429 vertical speed input No. 1 ~ ARINC 429 vertical
speed input No. 2, ARINC 575 analog dc vertical speed input, and ARINC 565 analog ac vertical speed input. Interconnect strapping
determines which source is selected. Strapped pins are connected to configuration strap common, pin 15. Determine the input source
to be used, then refer to the following list and strap the applicable pin(s) to configuration strap common, pin 15.
2-93
Source Pin No
ARINC 429 in HS 34
ARINC 429 in LS 32, 33, 34
ARINC 575 dc anlg 31, 32, 34
ARINC 575 ac anlg 31, 33, 34
Pneumatic 32, 34
2.3.5.1.17. TVI-920 TCAS II VSl/RA/TA Indicator - TVI-920 Configuration. Configuration strapping is used to configure
the TVI-920 to the specific installation. Five configurations have been defined: pop-up traffic with local mode and range control,
pop-up traffic with remote mode and range control, VSI with TCAS resolution advisories RA-only, VSI only, and full-time traffic
operation. Determine the configuration that is needed, then refer to the following list and strap the applicable pin(s) to configuration
strap common, pin 15.
Configuration Pin No
Pop-up traffic, local mode/range 36, 37, 38

control
Pop-up traffic, remote mode range 37, 38
control
VSI/RA display only, no traffic display 36, 38
VSI/RA and full-time traffic display 38
VSI display only, no TCAS display 36, 37
2.3.5.1.18. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Altitude Select.
NOTE
Gillham data is not available in an ARINC 718A or ARINC718A-4 configuration.
The TPR-720/-900/-901 will accept altitude data from any of four different types of sources. The type of source is programmed,
using the following program pins. Determine the type of altitude-data source being used and connect the applicable pin(s) to altitude
type select common, MP-6H, according to the following list.
Source Type Pin No

ARINC 429 digital data None
Fine/coarse synchro MP-6G
ARINC 575 digital data MP-6F
Gillham data MP-6F, MP-6G
2.3.5.1.19. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Source Destination Identifier (SDI). This input identifies the
transponder designation in the aircraft. Determine this, then refer to the following list and strap the applicable pin(s) to SDI common,
TP- 3J in an ARINC 718-4 configuration, or TP-5D in an ARINC 718A or ARINC 718A-4 configuration.
2-94
Transponder Pin No
Not used None
Transponder #1 TP-3H
Transponder #2 TP-3G
Transponder #3 TP-3G,
TP-3H
2.3.5.1.20. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Maximum Cruise True Airspeed. This input is used to pro-
gram the transponder for the maximum true airspeed capability of the aircraft for transmission in the mode S response. Determine the
maximum true airspeed capability, then refer to the following list, and strap the applicable pin(s) to program pin common, TP-5D.
Maximum Pin No
Airspeed
None available None
Up to 75 knots TP-5A
75 to 150 knots TP-5B
150 to 300 knots TP-5A, TP-5B
300 to 600 knots TP-5C
600 to 1200 knots TP-5A, TP-5C
More than 1200 knots TP-5B, TP-5C
2-95
2.3.5.1.21. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Antenna RF Load (TPR-720 only) . The antenna Radio Fre-
quency (RF) load program pin will inhibit the transponder from performing a transmitter power-on self-test and antenna BITE
monitoring when a coaxial antenna relay is used that does not have an RF load on the unselected (standby) transponder. (Refer to
Paragraph 2.3.5.1.24, Antenna BITE Program.)
2.3.5.1.21.1. To enable the transponder to do transmitter power-on self-test, standby receiver, and standby antenna BITE: TP-6C
is open.
2.3.5.1.21.2. To inhibit transponder self-test and antenna BITE: TP-6C is strapped to TP-5D.
2.3.5.1.22. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Transponder Fail Program Discrete (TPR-720/900
only). To be annunciated on the transponder fail discrete #1 (MP-3K) and #2 (TP-3B) outputs. These outputs may be programmed
to monitor the transponder system (ATC/Mode S transponder, control panel, transponder antennas if antenna BITE is used, and air
data source), or the transponder and antenna only. (Refer to Paragraph 2.3.5.1.24, Antenna BITE Program.)
2.3.5.1.22.1. To annunciate system monitoring: TP-6D is open.
2.3.5.1.22.2. To annunciate transponder-only and antenna-only Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) monitoring, TP-6D is strapped to
TP-5D.
2.3.5.1.22.3. Displays for the same functional failure are different for TPR-720 transponders with part number endings -201 and
-301. Table 2-8 shows the differences in the failure indications.
Table 2-8. Differences in Failure Indications.
FAULT [1] TCAS DISPLAY WITH XPNDR TCAS DISPLAY WITH XPNDR
622-7878-201 622-7878-301
Xpndr 1 fail See Note [2] TCAS (FAIL) TCAS (FAIL)
Top xpndr ant fail TCAS (FAIL) TCAS (FAIL)
Bottom xpndr ant fail See Note [3] TCAS OFF or TCAS See Note [3] TCAS OFF or TCAS
(FAIL) (FAIL)
Both xpndr ant fail TCAS (FAIL) TCAS (FAIL)
Control panel fail See Note [4]TCAS (FAIL) TCAS (FAIL)
Air data 1 fail See Notes [3] and [5] See Note [4]TCAS (FAIL) TCAS (FAIL)
Air data 2 fail See Notes [3] and [5] See Note [4]TCAS (FAIL) TCAS (FAIL)
NOTE
[1] With any indicated failure, control panel ATC FAIL lights. Fault light lit for transponder or transponder system LRU
failure on selected side for TTR-920 (dual) Service Bulletin 4 and above.
[2] In dual mode S installations, failure of selected transponder causes TCAS OFF indication on display. If both transponders
fail, display indicates TCAS (FAIL). If power is lost to selected side of TTC-920( ), indicator LED show dashes.
[3] TCAS OFF displayed for dual mode S transponder installation; TCAS (FAIL) displayed for a single Mode S transponder
installation.
[4] Not applicable to installations with TP-6D strapped to TP-5D (LRU-only monitoring).
[5] If Gillham altitude source is used, loss of altitude data, including altitude compare failure, will not cause ATC FAIL
indication.
2-96
2.3.5.1.23. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Antenna Configuration Program.
NOTE
Antenna configuration program is applicable to Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS) only instal-
lation and is not used for TCAS/Mode S installation.
The transponder may use only a bottom-mounted omnidirectional antenna, or top-and-bottom-mounted omnidirectional antennas.
This input is to program the transponder for the antenna configuration.
2.3.5.1.23.1. Where top and bottom omnidirectional antennas are installed, TP-6K is open.
2.3.5.1.23.2. Where only a bottom omnidirectional antenna is installed, TP-6K is strapped to TP-5D.
2.3.5.1.24. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Antenna BITE Program. The transponder may be programmed
to monitor the omnidirectional antenna installation if dc-type antennas are installed.
2.3.5.1.24.1. Where antenna monitoring is not desired: MP-5J is open.
2.3.5.1.24.2. Where antenna monitoring is desired: MP-5J is strapped to TP-5D.
2.3.5.1.25. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Altitude Comparison On/Off Control (ARINC 718-4 config-
uration only). Where Gillham-encoded altitude data is used to provide the transponder with altitude information, two sources are
required to be connected to the transponder for TCAS operation. This is due to the lack of monitoring of the altitude data. In instal-
lations where Gillham-encoded, altitude data is input to the transponder, MP-5G must be connected to aircraft dc ground.
2.3.5.1.26. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Mode S Aircraft Address. The TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode
S Transponder interface with the aircraft includes a requirement for a unique aircraft address to specifically identify the aircraft when
it is interrogated by mode S ground stations or TCAS.
2.3.5.1.26.1. For aircraft registered in the United States of America, the aircraft’s transponder mode S address is assigned by
the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Aeronautical Center, Aircraft Registration Branch (Oklahoma City, OK). Regulatory
agencies of other countries assign the mode S addresses for aircraft of their registry.
2.3.5.1.26.2. The mode S address is typically provided as an 8-digit octal number. This number must be translated into the appro-
priate transponder interface wiring and implemented at the mating connector on the rear of the equipment shelf in the aircraft. (The
address is permanently assigned to the aircraft and is not a function of individual transponder units.)
2.3.5.1.26.3. Table 2-9 identifies the transponder rear connector pin(s) that are associated with each of the octal numbers in the
8-digit group defining the aircraft address. In implementing the address in the aircraft wiring, the appropriate transponder pins are
connected to address common, MP-3E, on the transponder connector in an ARINC 718-4 configuration, or MP-6H in an ARINC
718A or ARINC 718A-4 configuration.
2.3.5.1.26.4. As an example, consider the assigned aircraft (octal number) address to be 64072153. Use Table 2-9 to determine
which pins of the transponder connector on the equipment rack to connect to common. The first (left-most) digit has value 6. Find
6 in the first column of the table, then move one column right to the first-digit position column. There, note that pins MP-1A and
MP-1B are to be connected to common. For the second digit value, 4, move down the first column to 4 then across that row to the
second-digit position column. There, note that pin MP-1D is to be connected to common. The third digit has value 0 and does not
require any pin to be connected to common.
2.3.5.1.26.5. For the second digit value, 4, move down the first column to 4 then across that row to the second-digit position
column. There, note that pin MP-1D is to be connected to common. The third digit has value 0 and does not require any pin to be
connected to common. Refer to Table 2-9.
2-97
Table 2-9. Mode S Address Connector Pin Configuration.
DIGIT POSITION IN ADDRESS

ADRS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIGIT (LEFT- (RIGHT-
VALUE MOST) MOST)
0 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE
1 MP-1C MP-1F MP-1J MP-2B MP-2E MP-2H MP-3A MP-3D
2 MP-1B MP-1E MP-1H MP-2A MP-2D MP-2G MP-2K MP-3C
3 MP-1B, MP-1E, MP-1E, MP-2A, MP-2D, MP-2G, MP-2K MP-3C,
MP-1C MP-1F MP-1F MP-2B MP-2E MP-2H .MP-3A MP-3D
4 MP-1A MP-1D MP-1G MP-1K MP-2C, MP-2F MP-2J MP-3B
5 MP-1A, MP-1D, MP-1G, MP-1K, MP-2C, MP-2F, MP-2J, MP-3B
MP-1CB MP-1F MP-1J MP-2B MP-2E MP-2H MP-3A MP-3D
6 MP-1A, MP-1D, MP-1G, MP-1K, MP-2C, MP-2F, MP-2J, MP-3B,
MP-1 MP-1E MP-1H MP-2A MP-2D MP-2G MP-2K MP-3C
7 MP-1A, MP-1D, MP-1G, MP-1K, MP-2C, MP-2F, MP-2J, MP-3B,
MP-1B, MP-1E, MP-1H, MP-2A, MP-2D, MP-2G, MP-2K, MP-3C,
MP-1C MP-1F MP-1J MP-2B MP-2E MP-2H MP-3A MP-3D
2.3.5.1.26.6. Continue in this manner until all eight digits are accounted for. The example address requires the following pin
connections to MP-3E. For 6, MP-1A and MP-1B; for 4, MP-1D; for 0, none; for 7, MP-1K, MP-2A and MP-2B; for 2, MP-2D; for
1, MP-2H; for 5, MP-2J and MP-3A; for 3, MP-3C and MP-3D.
2.3.5.1.27. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Backwards Incompatibility Discrete. Pin BP-2 is strapped
to aircraft ground to indicate to the transponder that the installation is configured for ARINC 718A rear connector pin definitions
and is not compatible with ARINC 718-4 pin definitions. ARINC 718A-compliant versions of the TPR-901 configure the rear
connector pin definitions to be either ARINC 718A or ARINC 718-4 compliant based on the state of this program pin. ARINC
718A-4 Transponders utilize the BP-2 Backward Incompatibility Discrete per ARINC 718A-4. One exception to ARINC 718A-4
configures TP-3F to be common, regardless of BP-2 strapping.
2.3.5.1.28. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Aircraft Category Program Pin No.s 1, 2, and 3. These pins
are used to program the aircraft category (ARINC 718A Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-10. Pins indicated with a 1 are
strapped to Middle Plug Common (MP-6H) and pins indicated with a 0 are open.
Table 2-10. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Aircraft Category Program Pin No.s 1, 2, and 3.
BP-4 CAT #1 BP-5 CAT #2 BP-6 CAT # 3 DESCRIPTION

0 0 0 No Aircraft Category Information
0 0 1 No Aircraft Category Information
0 1 0 Medium (12 500 to 75 000 lbs.)
0 1 1 Large (75 000 to 300 000 lbs.)
1 0 0 High-Vortex Large
1 0 1 Heavy (> 300 000 lbs.)
2-98
Table 2-10. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Aircraft Category Program Pin No.s 1, 2, and 3. - Continued
BP-4 CAT #1 BP-5 CAT #2 BP-6 CAT # 3 DESCRIPTION

1 1 0 High Performance (>5G acceleration and >400 knots)
1 1 1 Rotorcraft
2.3.5.1.29. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Extended Squitter Disable (ARINC 718A Configurations
Only). Pin MP-5G is strapped to Middle Plug Common (MP-6H) to disable all Extended Squitter functions. Typical installations
will leave this pin open.
2.3.5.1.30. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - Alt Comp Fail Out/Data Loader Discrete In. (ARINC 718-4
Configurations Only) Pin MP-3J is used to drive an Altitude Comparitor Fail annunciator. Care must be taken to make sure that the
annunciation circuit connected to the transponder presents a load impedence of 12KOhm, or greater, or a voltage of 6.5 V dc, or
greater.
2.3.5.1.30.1. (ARINC 718A and ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only) Pin MP-3J is used to activate the Data Load Function.
The pin should normally be open.
2.3.5.1.31. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder - 24Bit/APM Select (future use for ARINC 718A and ARINC
718A-4 Configurations Only). Pin MP-3E is normally connected to MP-6H to indicate that the source of the Mode S Address is
from the discrete Mode S Address pins. Pin MP-3E is open when the source of the Mode-S Address is from an Avionics Personality
Module (APM).
2.3.5.1.32. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Aircraft/Vehicle Length/Width. Pins TP-1A, TP-1B, and TP-1C are used
to program the Aircraft/Vehicle Length/Width (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-11. Pins indicated with a 1
are strapped to Top Plug Common (TP-5D) and pins indicated with a 0 are open. Pins indicated with a 2 are strapped to Top Plug
XPDR Fail #2 (TP-3B) indicating a Strobe Discrete.
Table 2-11. GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset Encoding
AIRCRAFT / VEHICLE LENGTH / WIDTH ENCODING

(TP-1A is not Strobed. TP-1B and Length Code Width Upper Bound Length
TP-1C are Strobed.) Code and Width for Each
Length / Width Code
State # PIN Register 65 HEX "ME" Field Length Width
TP-1A TP-1B TP-1C Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 (meters) (meters)
(A) (B) (C)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No Data or Unknown
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 ≤ 15 ≤ 23
2 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 ≤ 25 ≤ 28.5
3 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 ≤ 34
4 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 ≤ 35 ≤ 33
5 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 ≤ 38
6 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 ≤ 45 ≤ 39.5
7 0 2 1 0 1 1 1 ≤ 45
8 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 ≤ 55 ≤ 45
9 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 ≤ 52
2-99
Table 2-11. GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset Encoding - Continued
AIRCRAFT / VEHICLE LENGTH / WIDTH ENCODING

(TP-1A is not Strobed. TP-1B and Length Code Width Upper Bound Length
TP-1C are Strobed.) Code and Width for Each
Length / Width Code
State # PIN Register 65 HEX "ME" Field Length Width
TP-1A TP-1B TP-1C Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23 Bit 24 (meters) (meters)
(A) (B) (C)
10 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 ≤ 65 ≤ 59.5
11 1 0 2 0 0 1 1 ≤ 67
12 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 ≤ 75 ≤ 72.5
13 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 ≤ 80
14 1 1 2 0 1 1 0 ≤ 85 ≤ 80
15 1 2 0 0 1 1 1 ≤ 90
16 1 2 1 0 NOT USED
17 1 2 2 0 NOT USED
NOTE
Logic 0 is designated by leaving the pin in the open-circuit state.
Logic 1 is designated by connecting the pin to Top Plug Common (TP-5D).
Logic 1 is designated by connecting the pin to XPDR Fail #2 (TP-3D).
TP-1A does not connect to TP-3B at any time. Therefore, TP-1A is NOT Strobed.
If the Aircraft / Vehicle is longer than 85 meters, or wider than 90 meters, then the Pin Configuration and bit encoding shall
be set to that indicated for State #15.
2.3.5.1.33. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Aircraft/Vehicle Length/Width. Pins TP-1D, TP-1E, and TP-1F are used to
program the GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-12. Pins indicated with a 1
2-100
Table 2-12. Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity NACv Encoding
GPS ANTENNA LONGITUDINAL OFFSET ENCODING

(TP-1D, TP-1E and TP-1F are Strobed) Upper Bound of the GPS
Antenna Offset along
State # PIN Register 65 HEX "ME" Field
Longitudinal (Roll) Axis
TP-1D TP-1E TP-1F Bit 36 Bit 37 Bit 38 Bit 39 Bit 40 Aft from Aircraft Nose
(A) (B) (C) (meters)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or NO DATA
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Position Offet Applied by
Sensor
2 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 2
3 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 4
4 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 6
5 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 1 8
6 0 2 0 0 0 1 1 0 10
7 0 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 12
8 0 2 2 0 1 0 0 0 14
9 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 16
10 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 18
11 1 0 2 0 1 0 1 1 20
12 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 22
13 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 24
14 1 1 2 0 1 1 1 0 26
15 1 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 28
16 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 30
17 1 2 2 1 0 0 0 1 32
18 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 34
19 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 36
20 2 0 2 1 0 1 0 0 38
21 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 40
22 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 42
23 2 1 2 1 0 1 1 1 44
24 2 2 0 1 1 0 0 0 46
25 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 1 48
26 2 2 2 1 1 0 1 0 50
2-101
Table 2-12. Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity NACv Encoding - Continued
GPS ANTENNA LONGITUDINAL OFFSET ENCODING

(TP-1D, TP-1E and TP-1F are Strobed) Upper Bound of the GPS
Antenna Offset along
State # PIN Register 65 HEX "ME" Field
Longitudinal (Roll) Axis
TP-1D TP-1E TP-1F Bit 36 Bit 37 Bit 38 Bit 39 Bit 40 Aft from Aircraft Nose
(A) (B) (C) (meters)
NOT USED 1 1 0 1 1 52
1 1 1 0 0 54
1 1 1 0 1 56
1 1 1 1 0 58
1 1 1 1 1 60
NOTE
Logic 2 is designated by connecting the pin to XPDR Fail #2 (TP-3B).
If the GPS Antenna Longitudinal Pffset from the nose of the aircraft is in excess of 50 meters, then the Pin Configuration
and bit encoding shall be set to that indicated for State #26.
The encoding provided by the configuration pins has a maximum of 50 meters while the encoding provided for in Register
65 HEX can go up to 60 meters. The encoding provided by the configuration pins has been restricted in order to minimize
the number of discrete pins required by the function.
2.3.5.1.34. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Navigation Accuracy Category_Velocity (NACv). Pin TP-1G is used to
program the Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity (NACv) Encoding (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table
2-13. Pins indicated with a 1 are strapped to Top Plug Common (TP-5D) and pins indicated with a 0 are open. Pins indicated with
a 2 are strapped to Top Plug XPDR Fail #2 (TP-3B) indicating a Strobe Discrete.
Table 2-13. Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity NACv Encoding
NAVIGATION ACCURACY CATEGORY_VELOCITY (NACv) ENCODING

NACv Subfield Encoding (TP-1G is Strobed) Horizontal Velocity Error
State # PIN
binary decimal TP-1G
000 0 0 0 Unknown or ≥ 10 meters/second
001 1 1 1 < 10 meters/second
010 2 2 2 < 3 meters/second
011 3 NOT USED < 1 meter/second
100 4 < 0.3 meters/second
2-102
Table 2-13. Navigation Accuracy Category Velocity NACv Encoding - Continued
NAVIGATION ACCURACY CATEGORY_VELOCITY (NACv) ENCODING

NACv Subfield Encoding (TP-1G is Strobed) Horizontal Velocity Error
State # PIN
binary decimal TP-1G
101 5 NOT ASSIGNED IN RTCA DO-260B
110 6
111 7
NOTE
Encoding is only provided through State 2 as it will be well into the future before navigation sources will be capable of
providing NACv values approaching 1 meter/second.
If the NACv value to be encoded is less than 1 meter/second or better, then the Pin Configuration and bit encoding shall be
set to that indicated for State #2.
2.3.5.1.35. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Navigation Accuracy Category_Velocity (NACv). Pin TP-1H is used to
program the System Design Assurance (SDA) (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-14. Pins indicated with a 1
Table 2-14. System Design Assurance (SDA) Encoding
SYSTEM DESIGN ASSURANCE (SDA) ENCODING

PIN Encoding SDA Value Supported Failure Probability of Software and
Condition (Note 6) Undetected Fault Hardware Design
Register 65 HEX
causing transmission Assurance Level
Bits 31, 32
of False or Misleading (Notes 5, 7)
State # TP-1H (decimal) (binary) Information (Notes
7, 8)
0 0 0 00 Unknown / No Safety > 1X10-3 per flight N/A
Effect hour or Unknown
Not Used (Note 1) 1 01 Minor ≤ 1X10-3 per flight hour D
1 1 2 10 Major ≤ 1X10-5 per flight hour C
2-103
Table 2-14. System Design Assurance (SDA) Encoding - Continued
SYSTEM DESIGN ASSURANCE (SDA) ENCODING

PIN Encoding SDA Value Supported Failure Probability of Software and
Condition (Note 6) Undetected Fault Hardware Design
Register 65 HEX
causing transmission Assurance Level
Bits 31, 32
of False or Misleading (Notes 5, 7)
State # TP-1H (decimal) (binary) Information (Notes
7, 8)
2 2 3 11 Hazardous ≤ 1X10-7 per flight hour B
NOTE
1. It is expected that all GPS/GNSS and ADS-B Transmitting equipment to be associated with this Characteristic will
support a minimum design assurance of 10-5. Therefore, the 10-3 case having an SDA = 1 is NOT allowed, and there is no
encoding provision made with TP-1H.
2. 0 coding means that TP-1H is in the open-circuit state.
3. 1 coding means that TP-1H is connected to Middle Plug Common (MP-6H).
4. 2 coding means that TP-1H is connected to XPDR Fail #2 (TP-3B).
5. Software Design Assurance per RTCA DO-178B (EUROCAE ED-12B). Airborne Electronic Hardware Design Assur-
ance per RTCA DO-254 (EUROCAE ED-80).
6. Supported Failure Classification defined in AC-23, 1309-1C, AC-25, 1309-1A, and AC 29-2C.
7. Because the broadcast position can be used by any other ADS-B equipped aircraft or by ATC, the provisions in AC
23-1309-1C that allow reduction in failure probabilities and design assurance level for aircraft under 6,000 pounds do not
apply.
8. Includes probability of transmitting false or misleading latitude, longitude, velocity, or associated accuracy and integrity
metrics.
2.3.5.1.36. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Aircraft Category MP-4E MP-4F. Pins MP-4E and MP-4F is used to pro-
gram the Aircraft Category (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-14. Pins indicated with a 1 are strapped to
Middle Plug Common (MP-6H) and pins indicated with a 0 are open. Pins indicated with a 2 are strapped to Top Plug XPDR Fail
#2 (TP-3B) indicating a Strobe Discrete.
Table 2-15. Aircraft Category Encoding
AIRCRAFT CATEGORY ENCODING

(MP-4E and MP-4F are Strobed) Register 08 HEX AIRCRAFT CATEGORY
SELECTION
State # PIN ME Field
MP-4E (A) MP-4F (B) Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 No ADS-B Emitter Category Information
1 0 1 0 0 1 Light (< 15,500 lbs.)
2 0 2 0 1 0 Small (15,500 to 75,000 lbs.)
3 1 0 0 1 1 Large (75,000 to 300,000 lbs.)
2-104
Table 2-15. Aircraft Category Encoding - Continued
AIRCRAFT CATEGORY ENCODING

(MP-4E and MP-4F are Strobed) Register 08 HEX AIRCRAFT CATEGORY
SELECTION
State # PIN ME Field
MP-4E (A) MP-4F (B) Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8
4 1 1 1 0 0 High-Vortex Large (aircraft such
as B-757)
5 1 2 1 0 1 Heavy (> 300,000 lbs.)
6 2 0 1 1 0 High Performance (> 5G acceleration
and > 400 knots)
7 2 1 1 1 1 Rotorcraft
8 2 2 NOT USED
NOTE
2.3.5.1.37. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder ADS-B Configuration Parity MP-4G. Pin MP-4G is used to program the
ADS-B Configuration Parity (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-16 for an example. Once the connection
requirements are established for all of the necessary ADS-B Configuration Parameters and Pins, then establish the number of pins
that are connected to Common as illustrated in Column #8 of the table 2-15. Then, establish the parity (as illustrated in Column #9
of the table 2-15) and Connect MP-4G to Common if the Parity is ODD. Otherwise, leave MP-4G in the “open-circuit” state since
Parity is EVEN.
2-105
Table 2-16. ADS-B Configuration Parity Encoding
SAMPLES OF ADS-B CONFIGURATION PARITY ENCODING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PIN shown in Column #2 is # of Pins PARITY CON-
Connected to: Con- NECT
nected to MP-4G
ADS-B PIN STATE OPEN COMMON STROBE
Common TO
PARAMETER
OPEN TP-5D MP-6H TP-3B
AIRCRAFT TP-1A 1 (0) (Z) X
/ VEHICLE
TP-1B 0 (1) X (Z)
LENGTH / WIDTH
TP-1B 2 (0) (Z) X
GPS ANTENNA TP-1D 2 (0) (Z) X
LONGITUDINAL
TP-1E 1 (1) X (Z)
OFFSET
TP-1F 0 (1) X (Z) COM-
MON
NACv TP-1G 1 (0) (Z) X X=7 ODD AT
SYSTEM DESIGN TP-1H 1 (0) (Z) X (Z = 6) (EVEN) MP-6H
ASSURANCE
ADS-B FAIL TP-2K 0 (1) X (Z) (OPEN)
DISABLE
AIRCRAFT MP-4E 1 (1) X (Z)
CATEGORY
MP-4F 1 (0) (Z) X
ADS-B RECEIVE MP-4H 1 (1) X (Z)
CAPABILITY
NOTE
The ADS-B Configuration Parameters to be used to establish the ADS-B Configuration Parity are listed in Column #1.
The ADS-B Configuration Pins that are to be used to establish the ADS-B Configuration Parity are listed in Column #2.
Column #3 presents the state of the ADS-B Configuration Pins for two separate samples. Sample #1 is show in Bold Font
while sample #2 is shown in parenthesis.
Columns #4 through 7 indicate the actual connections that should be made for each ADS-B Configuration Parameter Pin
for each sample. Sample #1 is indicated with an X while sample #2 is shown with (Z).
Column #8 indicates the number of ADS-B Configuration Pins that are connected to Common for each of the two samples.
Sample #1 is shown as X=7 while sample #2 is shown as (Z=6).
Column #9 indicates the parity of the count established in Column #8 for each of the two samples. Sample #1 is shown as
ODD while sample #2 is shown as (EVEN).
Column #10 indicates the connection that should be made for MP-4G for each of the two samples. Sample #1 results in
MP-4G being connected to MP-6H. Sample #2 results in MP-4G being in the open-circuit state.
2.3.5.1.38. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder ADS-B Receive Capability MP-4H. Pin MP-4H is used to program the
ADS-B Receive Capability (ARINC 718A-4 Configurations Only). Refer to Table 2-17. Pins indicated with a 1 are strapped to
2-106
Middle Plug Common (MP-6H) and pins indicated with a 0 are open. Pins indicated with a 2 are strapped to Top Plug XPDR Fail
#2 (TP-3B) indicating a Strobe Discrete.
Table 2-17. ADS-B Receive Capability Encoding
ADS-B RECEIVE CAPABILITY ENCODING

PIN Encoding (Strobed) Selection/Meaning
State # MP-4H
0 0 Aircraft installation has no capability to receive either 1090 ES IN or UAT IN
1 1 Aircraft installation has capability to receive 1090 ES IN Only
2 2 Aircraft installation has capability to receive both 1090 ES IN and UAT IN
NOTE
0 coding means that MP-4H is in the open-circuit state.
1 coding means that MP-4H is connected to Middle Plug Common (MP-6H).
2 coding means that MP-4H is connected to XPDR Fail #2 (TP-3B).
It is expected that future implementations with TCAS or the Traffic Function will have additional capability ot communicate
the state of 1090ES IN and UAT IN. Presently, no such method is identified in this Characteristic.
2.3.5.2. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver System, Cooling, and Mounting requirements. TTR-920/-
921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver.
2.3.5.2.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires one transmitter-receiver.
2.3.5.2.2. Cooling Requirements. The transmitter-receiver does not require forced-air cooling. It is cooled by convection. Use
of forced-air cooling is recommended where possible. Make sure that any adjacent equipment does not obstruct airflow about or
through the transmitter-receiver.
2.3.5.2.3. Mounting Requirements. The transmitter-receiver is designed to be mounted in existing electronics racks meeting
ARINC Specification 600. Locate the transmitter-receiver in a position that permits access to the front panel TEST switch and fault
indicators.
2.3.5.2.3.1. Figure 2-11 shows outline and mounting dimensions for TTR-920 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. Figure 2-12 shows
outline and mounting dimensions for TTR-921 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. Figure 2-13 shows outline and mounting dimensions
for TTR-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver.
2-107/(2-108 Blank)
Figure 2-11. TTR-920 Outline and Mounting Dimensions
2-109/(2-110 Blank)
Figure 2-12. TTR-921 Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-111/(2-112 Blank)
2-113/(2-114 Blank)
2-115/(2-116 Blank)
2-117/(2-118 Blank)
2-119/(2-120 Blank)
2-121/(2-122 Blank)
2.3.5.3. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator. The following paragraphs show the system, cooling, and mounting require-
ments for the TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator.
2.3.5.3.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires two RA indicators. (These are driven with the transmitter-
receiver.) This permits one display for each cockpit position.
2.3.5.3.2. Cooling Requirements. The resolution indicator does not require forced-air cooling. It is cooled by convection.
Make sure that any adjacent equipment does not obstruct airflow about or through the vertical indicator.
2.3.5.3.3. Mounting. The resolution indicator is mounted in the cockpit panel in a 3-ATI (Instrument Size Unit of Measure)
opening. A mooring plate is recommended for securing the indicator to the panel. Refer to Figure 2-14 for outline and mounting
dimensions.
2-123/(2-124 Blank)
Figure 2-14. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator Outline and Mounting Dimensions
2-125/(2-126 Blank)
2.3.5.4. TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control. The following paragraphs show the system, cooling, and mounting re-
quirements for the TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control.
2.3.5.4.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires one TCAS/transponder control.
2.3.5.4.2. Cooling Requirements. The TCAS/transponder control does not require forced-air cooling. It is cooled by convec-
tion. Make sure that any adjacent equipment does not obstruct airflow about or through the control.
2.3.5.4.3. Mounting. The control is mounted in the cockpit panel or the console, using Dzus fasteners. It should be mounted
in a convenient location to provide easy access for the flight crew. Refer to Figure 2-15 for TTC-920/-920G outline and mounting
dimensions. Refer to Figure 2-16 for TTC-920A outline and mounting dimensions.
2-127/(2-128 Blank)
Figure 2-15. TTC-920/-920G Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-129/(2-130 Blank)
Figure 2-15. TTC-920/-920G Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-131/(2-132 Blank)
Figure 2-16. TTC-920A Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-133/(2-134 Blank)
Figure 2-16. TTC-920A Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-135/(2-136 Blank)
2.3.5.5. TRE-920( ) TCAS II Directional Antenna. The following paragraphs show the system, cooling, and mounting require-
ments for the TRE-920( ) TCAS II Directional Antenna.
2.3.5.5.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires two antennas, one of which must be the TCAS II directional
antenna. The second antenna may be an omnidirectional L-band antenna; but, use of a second directional antenna, instead of the
omnidirectional antenna, is optional.
2.3.5.5.2. Cooling Requirements. No cooling is required.
2.3.5.5.3. Mounting. The directional antenna is to be mounted to the top and bottom of the fuselage. It should be mounted in a
location that will keep the interconnecting coaxial cables as short as practicable.
2.3.5.5.3.1. Do standard antenna installation practices to assure adequate antenna separation from other antennas, especially an-
tennas associated with other L-band systems (ATC/mode S transponders and Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) and Automatic
Direction Finder (ADF) systems. The objective should be to achieve about 20 dB of isolation. This corresponds to about 2.5 wave-
lengths or about 76.2 cm (30 in).
2.3.5.5.3.2. The airplane skin surface at the TRE-920 mounting location should be inspected for dirt and corrosion and cleaned as
necessary. Install an O-ring, CPN 841- 0004-010 (NAS160-153), in the groove on the bottom of the antenna. Position the antenna
in place and secure with four mounting screws. Stainless steel socket head cap screws are recommended. Zinc, cadmium plated, or
aluminum alloy screws are not recommended.
2.3.5.5.3.3. Tighten the screws to near contact with the bearing surface and determine the friction drag torque. Tighten the friction
drag torque to 2.88 ±0.58 kg.cm (25 ±5 inlb).
2.3.5.5.3.4. Apply any weather/aerodynamic fillet of sealant to the periphery of the antenna and shape as necessary. The height
of the bead should not exceed 2.5 mm (0.1 in).
2.3.5.5.3.5. Install the four, foam-rubber plugs (CPN 676-3291-002) in the antenna mounting holes, pressing them down below
the antenna surface. Cover the plugs with a layer of Dow Corning gray RTV-3145 (CPN 005-1531-010 for three, 85.08-gram (3-oz),
collapsible tubes, or CPN 005-2531-030 for one, 311.84-gram (11-oz) cartridge) or equivalent sealant, having a dielectric constant
of 2.8 or less and a loss tangent of 0.001 or less at 1 GHz. Feather sealant over mounting holes and remove any excess sealant.
2.3.5.5.3.6. Refer to Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-18 for the TRE-920 outline and mounting dimensions.
2.3.5.5.3.7. Bonding measurements between the TRE-920 and the aircraft are best made from underneath the antenna, using the
exposed base plate that the rf coaxial cables go through. The reasons are:
• The metal inserts seen in the bolt holes from the top of the antenna do not conduct to the base plate, which is the antenna ground.
This makes accurate probing through the top bolt hole is difficult and intermittent.
• The base plate is thin -- less than 0.25".
• Finding an aircraft ground point near the antenna can be difficult.
See the appropriate aircraft maintenance manual for guidance on required antenna bonding.
2-137/(2-138 Blank)
Figure 2-17. TRE-920 Directional Antenna (CPN 622-8973-001 through -004), Outline and Mounting Dimensions
2-139/(2-140 Blank)
Figure 2-18. TRE-920 Directional Antenna (CPN 622-8973-101 through -104), Outline and Mounting Dimensions
2-141/(2-142 Blank)
2.3.5.6. L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna for TCAS. The following paragraphs show the system, cooling, and mounting re-
quirements for the L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna.
2.3.5.6.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires two antennas, one of which is a TRE-920( ) TCAS II Direc-
tional Antenna mounted on top of the fuselage. The second antenna may be either another TRE-920( ) or an L-band omnidirectional
antenna.
2.3.5.6.2. Cooling Requirements. No cooling is required for the antennas.
2.3.5.6.3. Mounting. The omnidirectional antenna is to be mounted to the bottom of the fuselage in a location, which will keep
the interconnecting coaxial cables as short as practicable. Do standard antenna installation practices to make sure there is adequate
antenna separation from other antennas.
2.3.5.7. TPR-720/900/901 ATC/Mode S Transponder. The following paragraphs show the System, Cooling, and Mounting
requirements for the TPR-720/900/901 ATC/Mode S Transponder.
2.3.5.7.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires two transponders, one of which must be a TPR- 720/900/901
ATC/Mode S Transponder. The second transponder may be non-mode S.
2.3.5.7.2. Cooling Requirements. The TPR-720/900/901 transponder does not require forced-air cooling. It is cooled by con-
vection. Make sure that any adjacent equipment does not obstruct airflow about or through the transponder.
2.3.5.7.3. Mounting. The TPR-720/900/901 transponder is designed to be mounted in existing electronics racks meeting ARINC
Specification 600. Locate the transponder in a position that permits access to the front panel TEST switch and fault indicators. For
outline and mounting dimensions, refer to Figure 2-19 for TPR-720, Figure 2-20 for TPR-900, and Figure 2-21 for TPR-901.
2-143/(2-144 Blank)
Figure 2-19. TPR-720 Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-145/(2-146 Blank)
Figure 2-19. TPR-720 Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-147/(2-148 Blank)
Figure 2-20. 900 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-149/(2-150 Blank)
Figure 2-20. 900 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-151/(2-152 Blank)
Figure 2-21. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-153/(2-154 Blank)
Figure 2-21. TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder, Outline and Mounting Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-155/(2-156 Blank)
2.3.5.8. L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna for Transponder. The following paragraphs show the system cooling and mounting
requirements for the L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna.
2.3.5.8.1. System Requirements. The TCAS II system requires two antennas, one of which is a TRE-920( ) TCAS II Direc-
tional Antenna that is mounted on top of the fuselage and one on the bottom of the fuselage. Four antennas may be installed, a set
for each transponder, ATC or Mode S, or one set switched between the two ATC/Mode S transponders.
2.3.5.8.2. Cooling Requirements. No cooling is required for the antennas.
2.3.5.8.3. Mounting. The omnidirectional antennas are to be mounted to the top and to the bottom of the fuselage in a location
that will keep the interconnecting coaxial cables as short as practicable. Do standard antenna installation practices to assure adequate
antenna separation from other antennas, especially antennas associated with other L-band systems (ATC/mode S transponders and
DME) and ADF systems.
2.3.6. Wiring Tests.
After installation of the cabling and before installation of the equipment, make a continuity check of all interconnect wiring. When
the check is completed, apply power and make sure that voltage is present only at the pins specified by the wiring diagram.
2.3.7. Equipment Mechanical Check.
The TCAS II system equipment is ready for installation in the aircraft as shipped from the factory. Unpack and carefully inspect the
equipment for possible shipping damage. All claims for damage should be filed with the transportation company involved. If claims
are to be filed, save the original shipping carton(s) and materials.
2.4. PREPARATION PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLATION.

Proper and careful planning prior to installation is essential for reliable performance and easy maintenance. The list that follows is
a sample of the points to be considered in planning an installation:
• Installation location: Allow for adequate airflow for cooling, good bonding to aircraft ground, ease of cable routing, room for
single/dual/triple mounting in a location that has structural rigidity
• Installation configuration
• Compatibility with other equipment and loading considerations.
2.4.1. Visual Inspection.

Check the unit for:
• Damaged parts (particularly to connector pins and component solder fillets)
• Missing parts
• Foreign material
• Improperly mated assemblies
• Improper and/or loose hardware.
2.5. TCAS II LINE REPLACEABLE UNIT MOUNTING.

The following paragraphs and figures give mounting instructions and show mounting locations for TCAS II Line Replaceable
Units (LRU).
2.5.1. TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna.
Refer to Figure 2-22 for TRE-920 Directional Antenna mounting location.
2-157
Figure 2-22. TRE-920 Directional Antenna Mounting Location (Sheet 1 of 2)
2-158
Figure 2-22. TRE-920 Directional Antenna Mounting Location (Sheet 2 of 2)
2-159
2.6. INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL.

2.6.1. TTR-920/-921 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver.
Installation, removal, and change V7.1 installation procedures follow.
2.6.1.1. Installation.
a. Position the Transmitter-Receiver (TTR) in its mount in the electronics rack.
b. Carefully push the TTR toward the mating connector, until the connectors mate.
c. Tighten the knurled hold-down knobs that secure the TTR to the mount.
d. Safety-wire the knurled hold-down knobs, if so-equipped.
2.6.1.2. Removal.
a. Remove any safety wire and loosen the knurled, hold-down knobs securing the TTR to the mount.
b. Carefully pull the TTR forward until it is disconnected from the mount mating connector.
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) COMPONENTS

THAT CAN BE DAMAGED BY STATIC VOLTAGES PRESENT IN MOST REPAIR FACILITIES.
NOTE
For detailed repair/cleaning instructions, refer to Avionics Standard Shop Practices Instruction Book, CPN 523-
0768039.
2.6.1.3. To install software change V7.1, do the steps that follow.

a. Dataload unit with dataload disk (CPN 831-6230-807) in accordance with dataload procedures listed in the CMMPL.
b. Change the hardware part number using the RFT test station. If an RFT-900 is being used, go to Step (1). If an RFT-1000 is
being used, go to Step (2).
(1) Do the following on the RFT-900.
NOTE
This procedure is valid when using PTR software CPN 826-7021-039, or later, and the RFT-900 has
Service Bulletin 55, or later, installed.
(a) Mount Unit Under Test (UUT) onto station.

(b) Run ADATE software (CPN 827-2900-015 or later).
(c) At HEADER INFORMATION screen, enter the NEW part number (CPN 822-1293-033, CPN 822-1293-332, CPN
822-1294-032 or CPN 822-1294-432) along with all other requested information.
(d) Run Specification Test (Final Data), selection number 20, from the main menu and follow all on screen instructions.
(e) The station must run completely through block 3000 (SOFTWARE.BLK) to update the hardware part number.
(f) Once block 3000 is complete, press CTRL-F10.
(2) Do the following on the RFT-1000.
NOTE
This procedure is valid when using PTR software CPN 832-8530-015, or later.
2-160
(a) Remove cover and mount UUT onto the station.

(b) Run ADATE software (CPN 826-9694-022 or later).
(c) At the HEADER INFORMATION screen, enter the NEW part number (CPN 822-1293-033, CPN 822-1293-332,
CPN 822-1294-032 or CPN 822-1294-432) along with all other requested information.
(d) Run Specification Test (Final Data), selection number 20, from the main menu and follow all on screen instructions.
(e) The station must run completely through block 3000 (SOFTWARE.BLK) to update the hardware part number.
(f) Once block 3000 is complete, press CTRL-F10.
2.6.1.4. Testing Procedure. Test the unit in accordance with the test procedures in CMMPL TTR-921 TCAS Transmitter-Re-
ceiver and TRE-920( )/TRE-930 TCAS Antenna component maintenance manual (CPN 523-0810647).
2.6.1.5. Identification Procedure.
NOTE
The identification procedure must be accomplished in order for these procedures to be complete.
To complete the identification procedure, do the following steps.

a. Make a note of the weight marked on the unit identification plate. Remove and discard the identification plate.
NOTE
Refer to All Avionics Service Information Letter 3-03, titled "Disposal of Retired TSO Nameplates." for disposal
of old identification plates.
b. Mark the new identification plate, CPN 829-0330-021 for CPN 822-1293 with weight noted in step a, above and new unit dash
number. Refer to Table 2-18. The new unit part number is identification of this installation of this service bulletin. Do not mark
out Service Bulletin "504".
Table 2-18. New Unit Identification.
OLD UNIT CPN NEW UNIT CPN NEW ID PLATE CPN

822-1293-002/-003 811-1293-033 829-0330-021
822-1293-322 822-1293-332 829-0330-021
c. If the identification plate being changed is a linear bar code identification plate then replace the identification plate (mod status)
with CPN 829-0200-018. The identification plate and mod status must match.
d. Install the new identification plate.
e. Due to the change of the part number of this unit, the customer is notified of the change by including the following statement,
with the appropriate part numbers on the repair work sheet/service memorandum:
This unit was received with a part number of CPN 822-1293-002/003/322 and has been modified to a unit with a part number
of CPN 822-1293-033/332. Installation of units modified in accordance with Service Bulletin "504" requires a change to the
aircraft TC/STC data, unless the new part number is already included in the data.
2.6.2. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/FWTA Indicator.
The following paragraphs give installation and removal Instructions for the TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/FWTA Indicator.
a. If a mooring plate is used for mounting, position it over the indicator first. Then, connect the interconnect cable mating con-
nector to the indicator connector. Make sure that the mating connector bayonet-locking sleeve is securely fastened.
b. Position the indicator in its location on the instrument panel.
c. Secure the indicator to the instrument panel (or mooring plate) with machine screws at each corner of the indicator.
2-161
2.6.2.1. Installation
a. If a mooring plate is used for mounting, position it over the indicator first. Then, connect the interconnect cable mating con-
nector to the indicator connector. Make sure that the mating connector bayonet-locking sleeve is securely fastened.
b. Position the indicator in its location on the instrument panel.
c. Secure the indicator to the instrument panel (or mooring plate) with machine screws at each corner of the indicator.
2.6.2.2. Removal.
a. Remove the machine screws securing the indicator to the instrument panel (or mooring plate).
b. Carefully remove the indicator from the instrument panel.
c. Disconnect the mating connector from the indicator connector.
2.6.3. TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control.
Installation.
a. Connect the mating connectors to the rear connectors on the control. Make sure that the mating connector bayonet locking
sleeves are securely fastened.
b. Position the control in its location (in the instrument panel or on the console) and secure it in place with four Dzus fasteners
that are located on the outside edges of the front of the control.
2.6.3.1. Removal.
a. Loosen the four Dzus fasteners securing the control to its (instrument panel or console) location.
b. Carefully pull the control from its position and disconnect the rear mating connectors.
2.6.4. TRE-920( ) TCAS II Directional Antenna.
Installation.
2.6.4.1. Installation data for the TRE-920C directional antenna is provided in service bulletins prepared by Aerospatiale. Inquire
at this address:
Attn: AIDAVIDRIA2
Center de Documentationl Guynemer
Center de Documentationl Guynemer Route de Guynemer
31 770 Colomiers
FRANCE
2.6.4.2. In addition to the TRE-920C antenna, an O-ring and gasket, and mounting clamp ring are required for each antenna.
Refer to the Aerospatiale service bulletins for information about the clamp ring. The O-ring (CPN 830-4924-001) and gasket (CPN
830-4056-001) are available from Rockwell Collins.
2.6.4.3. Refer to the Aerospatiale service bulletins for further installation data.
USE CLEANING SOLVENTS IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. DO NOT INHALE VAPOR. DO NOT

ALLOW FLUID TO CONTACT THE SKIN. PROLONGED EXPOSURE MAY RESULT IN UNCON-
SCIOUSNESS OR LUNG OR SKIN IRRITATION.
2.6.4.4. The following is a general procedure for installing the TRE-920 directional antenna. The installer is referred to the appli-
cable aircraft maintenance manual for specific information regarding the installation of the antenna and the approved, recommended
materials for use in fuselage surface preparation and sealing.
2-162
a. Visually inspect mounting surfaces of the antenna and aircraft for corrosion and dirt. Clean mounting surfaces as required. If
the antenna is mounted on a painted surface, or if a gasket is used, the thickness of the paint and/or gasket should not exceed
0.50-mm (0.020-in). Gasket material should be weather-durable, high Durometer elastomer.
b. Apply corrosion-inhibiting compound, if approved, to the mounting surfaces of the antenna and aircraft.
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO ANTENNA CABLES, DO NOT PULL ON THEM.
c. For antennas:
• With CPN 622-8973-00X, install O-ring CPN 841-0004-010 in the groove on the bottom surface of the antenna
• For antennas with CPN 622-8973-104, install a modified O-ring CPN 841-0005-010 (Place the flat side of the O-ring to the
bottom of the groove in the antenna), and the gasket CPN 830-0406-001.
d. Pack the connector base area with grease from the O-ring inward to the connector flanges, up to, but not over the connector
color identification band.
NOTE
Values for shunt resistance to ground for each connector is as follows:
J1 - 5.62KOhms J2 - 15.0KOhms
J3 - 33.2KOhms J4 - 86.6KOhms
e. Connect the coaxial cables to the antenna. Antenna connectors are color-coded as follows: J1 -Yellow, J2 - Black, J3 - Blue,
J4 - Red.
NOTE
Stainless steel socket head cap screws are recommended for mounting the antenna. Zinc, cadmium-plated, or
aluminum alloy screws are not recommended.
f. Position the antenna in place and install the mounting screws (four or eight places), through the antenna mounting boss. Tighten
the screws to near contact with the bearing surface and determine the friction drag torque that is required to turn the securing
nut.
DO NOT ALLOW SEALANT TO CONTACT SKIN OR EYES. PROLONGED EXPOSURE MAY RE-
SULT IN SKIN OR EYE IRRITATION.
g. Torque screws to the following values.

• For TRE-920, 622-8973-001, -002, -003, and -004: friction drag torque plus 28.8 ±0.69 kg-cm (25 ±5 in-lb)
• For TRE-920, 622-8973-1 01, -1 02, -1 03, and -1 04:
Outer four screws: Friction drag torque plus 28.8 ±0.69 kg-cm (25 ±5 in-lb)
Inner four screws: Friction drag torque plus 14.4 ±2.88 kg-cm (12.5 ±2.5 in-lb).
2-163
h. Apply a weather/aerodynamic fillet sealant to the periphery of the antenna and shape as necessary. The height of the bead
should not exceed 2.5 mm (0.1 in). Remove any excess sealant.
i. Install four (or eight) foam rubber plugs, CPN 676-3291-002, in the antenna mounting holes, as follows.
(1) Press the plugs down below the antenna surface.
(2) Cover the plugs with a layer of Dow-Corning RW-3145 sealant, or electrical equivalent, having a dielectric constant of
2.8, or less, at 100 Hz.
(3) Blend the sealant smooth with the mounting holes.
(4) Remove any excess sealant.
j. If an alternate plug, such as dry cotton, is used, do not allow the sealant thickness to be greater than 3.2 mm (0.125 in).
k. Make sure the antenna is bonded. Do this by accessing the antenna base plate through its mounting hole, and measuring the
resistance from the base plate to the aircraft structure. Resistance must be within the range given in the aircraft maintenance
manual.
2.6.4.5. Removal. The following is a general procedure for removal of the antenna. Refer to the applicable aircraft maintenance
manual for specific information regarding the removal of the antenna and approved/recommended materials for use in fuselage
surface cleaning.
TO BREAK WEATHERPROOFING SEAL AT BASE OF ANTENNA, EXTRA FORCE MAY BE REQUIRED.

BEFORE APPLYING FORCE, CAREFULLY SEPARATE SEALANT FROM AROUND ANTENNA WITH
SEALANT-REMOVAL TOOL UNTIL SEAL IS COMPLETELY BROKEN. USE EXTREME CAUTION TO
MAKE SURE THAT THE ANTENNA IS NOT DAMAGED DURING REMOVAL.
a. Remove sealant, foam-rubber plug, and screws from the antenna base.
b. Pry around the antenna base with a sealant removal tool until the seal is completely broken.
IN REMOVING ANTENNA, DO NOT PULL ON CABLES. DAMAGE TO CABLES COULD RESULT. LIFT
ANTENNA ONLY FAR ENOUGH TO DISCONNECT CABLES.
c. Lift the antenna until the antenna connectors are accessible.

d. Disconnect the antenna cables and remove the antenna.

e. Remove old sealant from the aircraft skin.

2.6.5. L-Band Omnidirectional Antenna (for TCAS and Transponders).
Installation. The following is a general procedure for installing the ATC and TCAS omnidirectional antenna. Refer to the applica-
ble aircraft maintenance manual for specific information regarding the installation of the antenna and the approved/recommended
materials for use in fuselage surface preparation and sealing.
2-164

a. Visually inspect the mounting surfaces of the antenna and the airplane for corrosion and dirt. Clean the mounting surfaces as
required.
b. Apply a corrosion-inhibiting compound, if approved, to the mounting surfaces of the antenna and the aircraft.
c. Install an O-ring on the bottom surface of the antenna, if required.
d. Pack the connector-base area with grease to seal it.
IN REMOVING ANTENNA, DO NOT PULL ON CABLES. DAMAGE TO CABLES COULD RESULT. LIFT
ANTENNA ONLY FAR ENOUGH TO DISCONNECT CABLES.
e. Connect the coaxial cable to the antenna.

f. Position the antenna in place and install the mounting screws through the antenna mounting boss. Tighten the screws. (Refer
to the aircraft maintenance manual for any recommended torque requirements.)
g. Make sure the antenna is bonded, if required, by removing one mounting screw and measuring the resistance from the antenna
mounting boss to the aircraft skin. Resistance must be within the range given in the aircraft maintenance manual.
h. Reinstall the antenna-mounting screw.
DO NOT ALLOW SEALANT TO CONTACT SKIN OR EYES. PROLONGED EXPOSURE MAY RE-
SULT IN SKIN OR EYE IRRITATlON.
i. Apply a weather/aerodynamic fillet sealant to the periphery of the antenna and shape as necessary. Remove any excess sealant.
j. Put sealant in all antenna-mounting screw holes and shape the sealant to blend with the antenna surface. Remove any excess
sealant.
2.6.5.1. Removal. The following is a general procedure for removal of the ATC and TCAS omnidirectional antenna. Refer to the
applicable aircraft maintenance manual for specific information regarding the removal of the antenna and approved/recommended
materials for use in fuselage surface cleaning.
a. Remove sealant from the antenna-mounting screw holes, if necessary
b. Remove screws from the antenna base.
TO BREAK WEATHERPROOFING SEAL AT BASE OF ANTENNA, EXTRA FORCE MAY BE REQUIRED.

BEFORE APPLYING FORCE, CAREFULLY SEPARATE SEALANT FROM AROUND ANTENNA WITH
SEALANT-REMOVAL TOOL UNTIL SEAL IS COMPLETELY BROKEN. USE EXTREME CAUTION TO
MAKE SURE THAT THE ANTENNA IS NOT DAMAGED DURING REMOVAL.
c. Pry around the antenna base with a sealant removal tool, until the seal is completely broken.
2-165
IN REMOVING ANTENNA, DO NOT PULL ON COAXIAL CABLE. DAMAGE TO CABLE COULD RE-
SULT. LIFT ANTENNA ONLY FAR ENOUGH TO DISCONNECT CABLE.
d. Lift the antenna until the antenna connector is accessible.

e. Disconnect the antenna cable and remove the antenna.

f. Remove the old sealant from the aircraft skin.

2.6.6. TPR-720/-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder.
2.6.6.1. Installation.
a. Position the transponder in its mount in the electronics rack.
b. Carefully push the transponder toward the mating connector until the connectors mate.
c. Tighten the knurled hold-down knobs that secure the transponder to the mount.
d. Safety-wire the knurled hold-down knobs, if so-equipped.
2.6.6.2. Removal.
a. Remove any safety wire and loosen the knurled hold-down knobs securing the transponder to the mount.
b. Carefully pull the transponder forward until it is disconnected from the mount mating connector.
2.6.7. TTR-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver.
2.6.7.1. Installation
a. Place the TTR-2100 on the front of the equipment mounting tray.
b. Carefully slide the unit back on the mounting tray until the rear connector engages with the mating connector in the equipment
rack.
c. With the unit installed, raise the two hold-down fasteners on the front of the rack to engage the lockdown pawls on the front of
the unit.
d. Tighten each of the hold-down fasteners to secure the unit.
2.6.7.2. Removal
a. Loosen the two hold-down fasteners on the front of the equipment rack that secure the TTR-2100.
b. Disengage the hold-down fasteners from the locking pawls on the unit.
c. Grasp the handle on the unit, and carefully pull the unit straight out until the unit and mating connectors disengage.
d. Remove the unit from the equipment rack.
2-166
523-0820642
CHAPTER 3
Operation
3.1. OPERATION PROCEDURES.

This chapter discusses operation procedures for the TCAS II controls and indicators.
3.1.1. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver.
Table 3-1 lists the controls and indicators on the TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter- Receiver.
Table 3-1. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver, Controls and Indicators.
CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTlON

TTR PASS/FAIL (Green/Red) Lights green to indicate TTR self-test was successful. Lights red to indicate TTR
self-test failure.
XPNDR (Red) Lights to indicate transponder or data link interface failure.
UPPER ANT (Red) Lights to indicate upper TCAS antenna failure.1
LOWER ANT (Red) Lights to indicate lower TCAS antenna failure.1
RAD ALT (Red) Lights to indicate absence of radio altimeter data.
HDNG (Red) Lights to indicate absence of heading data.
R/A (Red) Lights to indicate failure of RA indicator.
T/A (Red) Lights to indicate failure of TA indicator.
TEST push button switch Starts self-test when pushed.
1 Faults due to cable calibration failures are not annunciated by the Upper/Lower Antenna lights.
3.1.2. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA.

Table 3-2 lists the controls and indicators on the TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA.
Table 3-2. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Controls and Indicators.
CONTROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION

0, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 6000 (fpm) Vertical speed index.
-White index marks and numbers
around speed scale
White vertical speed pointer Shows present vertical speed of the aircraft. Shows only when vertical speed data is
valid, or during unit test.
Colored arc along vertical speed scale; Red arc shows that the pilot is advised to fly out of, or not enter, indicated vertical
traffic resolution speed range (corrective/preventive). Green arc advises vertical speed range to be
attained (corrective RA).
VIS flag - yellow background with Shows invalid vertical speed data, no computed data, test, or internal failure.
black V/S characters
3-1
Operation 523-0820642
Table 3-2. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Controls and Indicators. - Continued

White aircraft symbol, range ring, and Shows reference point for traffic displays. Range ring shows 2-nmi radius about own
range scale aircraft symbol. With a no bearing message, only front half of range ring shows. Range
scale is 6 nmi or 12 nmi.
VERT SPEED X 1000 Feet Per Minute Shows when no traffic shows in pop-up mode or when strapping enables config 2
(FPM) white vertical speed legend VSI/RA-only.
Red, square RA symbol Shows range and bearing of traffic associated with resolution advisory situation. Data
tag shows altitude and climb/descend information on that traffic.
Yellow, circular TA symbol Indicates range and bearing of traffic associated with traffic alert situation. Data tag
shows altitude and climb/descend information on that traffic.
Cyan, solid diamond proximity traffic Shows range and bearing of detected traffic within ±1200 ft and 6 or 12 mi of own
symbol aircraft. Data tag shows altitude and climb/descend information on proximity traffic.
Cyan, open diamond other-traffic Indicates range and bearing of any detected traffic not classified as RA, TA, or proximity
symbol traffic. Data tag indicates altitude and climb/descend information on that traffic.
RA flag - yellow background with Indicates resolution advisory function is unreliable.
black W characters
TCAS flag - yellow background with Indicates failure of all TCAS functions.
black TCAS characters
TA ONLY annunciator - white box, Indicates that TCAS is operating in the TA-only mode.
black field with white TA ONLY
characters; changes to yellow if a TA
occurs
TCAS OFF flag-white box, black field Indicates that TCAS system is in standby.
with white TCAS OFF characters
ABOVE/BELOW annunciator - white Indicates selection of expanded altitude display volume.
ABV and BLW characters
TCAS TEST flag - white box, Indicates TCAS system is in test and that indicator is displaying test data.
black field with white TCAS TEST
characters
Mode M push-button (units with Pilot selection of indicator POP-UP or FULL TIME display. POP-UP selectable from
Collins Part Number (CPN) ending FULL TIME only if no TA or RA exists.
-2XX and -4XX only)
Range R push-button (units with CPN Pilot selection of indicator range; 6 nmi forward and 3 nmi behind. or 12 nmi forward
ending -2XX and -4XX only) and 6 nmi behind.
Above/below A/B push-button (units Pilot selection of altitude offset of +9 900 to -2 700 ft (above) or +2700 to -9900 ft
with CPN ending -3XX only) (below), relative to own aircraft.
3.1.3. TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control.

Table 3-3 lists the controls and indicators on the TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control.
3-2
Table 3-3. TTC-920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control, Controls and Indicators.

DISPLAY switches (not on all units)
TFC push-button switch Toggles TCAS between pop-up and full-time display modes.
ABS/REL switch Switches TCAS between relative and absolute altitude display modes.
RNG push-button switch Steps TCAS through display ranges when depressed.
ABOVE-N-BELOW switch Switches TCAS between different altitude-volume displays.
ABOVE offsets altitude volume to display traffic from 2700 ft below to 9900 ft above
own aircraft.
N (normal) volume is symmetrical from 2700 ft below to 2700 ft above aircraft.
BELOW offsets altitude volume to display traffic from 2700 ft above to 9900 ft below
own aircraft.
Mode selector switch - Enables TCAS to be set to standby (STBY), automatic (AUTO), or traffic advisory
STBY/AUTO/TA ONLY, or only (TA ONLY) mode of operation.
MODE selector switch - Enables transponder and TCAS to be set to TEST, standby (STBY), transponder only
TEST/STBY/TAWTA or TA ONLY, (XPDR), full TCAS (TNRA), or traffic advisory only (TA or TA ONLY) mode of
TFC, ALT RPT OFF operation, full-time display of traffic (TFC), altitude reporting off for Mode C operation
(ALT RPT OFF).
TEST switch Permits transponder and TCAS to be self-tested from cockpit.
Concentric code-select switches Selects transponder code to be transmitted.
Selected-code indicator Shows code selected by code-select switches.
IDENT switch Transmits ident pulse to ATC station when pushed.
Altitude source select (ALT) switch When lit, shows that the selected transponder system has failed.
(1 -OFF-2 or ON-OFF or L-OFF-R)R
FAIL indicator
Transponder selector (1 -STBY-2 or Enables selection of transponder no 1 or no 2, or setting both to standby.
L-STBY-R or L-R or 1-2)
3.1.4. WXI-711 Weather Radar Indicator, Controls and Indicators.

Table 3-4 lists the controls and indicators on the WXI-711 Weather Radar Indicator.
Table 3-4. WXI-711 Weather Radar Indicator, Controls and Indicators.

TFC push-button switch Switches display to traffic-only mode. Shows all traffic; range controlled by RNG
switch.
T/WX push-button switch Switches display to combined weather/traffic mode. Shows all traffic, and that range is
slaved to weather radar range.
WXR push-button switch Switches display to combined weather/traffic mode. TA and RA intruders, proximity
and other traffic displayed if a TA or RA is present. Display that range is slaved to
weather radar range.
3-3
Table 3-4. WXI-711 Weather Radar Indicator, Controls and Indicators. - Continued

ALT push-button switch Switches altitude of displayed traffic between relative altitude and flight-level altitude.
MKR control Varies display intensity of range and azimuth markers on CRT.
LFT/FWD/RGT push-button switches Offsets display to show more coverage in direction of selected switch. Normal
power-on mode is FWD.
INT control Controls brightness of entire display.
RNG push-button switch (Effective Selects 5, IO-, 20-, or 40-nmi range for traffic advisories.
only in TFC mode)
ON push-button switch Controls application of primary power to weather radar system; pressing once applies
power, pressing again removes power.
ABOVE/NORM/BELOW push-button Selects altitude volume within which traffic shows, relative to own-aircraft altitude.
switch
ABOVE offsets altitude volume to show traffic from 2700 ft below to 9900 ft above
own aircraft.
NORM volume is symmetrical from 2700 ft below to 2700 ft above own aircraft.
BELOW offsets altitude volume to show traffic from 2700 ft above to 9900 ft below
own aircraft.
TA and RA traffic always show.
CRT display Shows weather and, when selected, TCAS traffic advisory information.
3.1.5. TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators.

Table 3-5 lists the controls and indicators on the TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder.
Table 3-5. TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators.

PASS indicator (green) Lights to indicate BITE test is successful.
FAIL indicator (red) Lights to indicate a failure that is detected by BITE test.
UPPER ANT indicator (red) Lights to indicate that impedance of the upper antenna is excessive.
LOWER ANT indicator (red) Lights to indicate that impedance of the lower antenna is excessive.
ALT indicator (red) Lights to indicate failure of the altitude input source (barometric altitude input), or
failure of the internal line receiver circuit.
CTL indicator (red) Lights to indicate failure of the control input source (wrong control format), or failure
of the internal line receiver circuit.
TEST push-button switch Initiates self-test of transponder. During self-test, all indicators are lit for one second
immediately after the TEST switch is pushed. For the rest of the time that the switch is
depressed, and for ten seconds after its release, indicators associated with the results
of the test of monitored functions, light and remain lit. Afterward, indicators turn
off and remain off.
3-4
3.1.6. TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators.

Table 3-6 lists the controls and indicators on the TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder.
Table 3-6. TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder Controls and Indicators.

LRU Status (LED) Lights green to indicate that transponder passed BITE self test.
Illuminates red to indicate that transponder failed BITE self-test.
Antenna Top Fail (LED) Lights red during BITE self-test when impedance of upper antenna does not meet
specifications.
Antenna Bot Fail (LED) Lights red during BITE self-test when impedance of bottom antenna does not meet
specifications.
Altitude Fail (LED) Lights red during BITE self-test when altitude input source indicates failure of
barometric altitude input (wrong format or Gillham altitude source comparison fail), or
if internal data receiver circuit of transponder has failed.
Control Fail (LED) Lights red during BITE self-test when control input source indicates failure of control
input (wrong format), or if internal data receiver circuit of transponder has failed.
TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/TEST Switch for manually initiating BITE self-test. During self-test, transponder performs
(push-button switch) the following functions.
NOTE
TEST depressed less than 5 seconds:
• Stops normal processing
• Performs test of full-time, Read-Only Memory (ROM) checksum status
• Tests Random Access Memory (RAM)
• Stimulates receiver noise sources and monitors results
• Checks antenna integrity
• Injects simulated ATCRBS/mode S all-call into top and bottom receivers
• Samples transmitter monitor, following transmission, and verifies reply is correct
• Samples power supply monitor
• Performs test on non-active serial buses (TCAS, COMM A/B and C/D)
• Updates maintenance portion of nonvolatile memory
• Returns unit to normal operation
NOTE
All lamps show red for 2 seconds. Then the LRU status shows green and the other lamps continue to show red for 2 seconds.
Then all lamps go dark for 2 seconds. Then the test results are displayed for 30 seconds: LRU status - green for LRU with
no fails, red for LRU failure; all other lamps are dark for no fails, or show red for failure.
NOTE
TEST pushed for more than 5 seconds: Instead of self-test, unit reads nonvolatile memory fault data for last four flight legs
and lights applicable fault indicators.
3-5/(3-6 Blank)
523-0820642
CHAPTER 4
Theory of Operation
4.1. THEORY OF OPERATION.

This chapter discusses the principle of Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) and TCAS II theory of operation, to the LRU
level.
4.1.1. Principle of TCAS.
The TCAS is intended as a supplementary aid to the pilot in detecting the presence of nearby aircraft and determining their potential
as an airspace threat. The system interrogates the nearby aircraft’s transponder and uses its replies to compute a predicted flight path
for the aircraft. From this information, the TCAS can determine the possibility of a traffic conflict.
4.1.1.1. The TCAS directional antenna permits the system to determine the direction of the other aircraft. Reply data from the
transponder of the other aircraft provides altitude information. Receiving and processing several transponder transmissions from the
other aircraft allows the TCAS computer to determine range and range rate. Once the direction, altitude, range, and range rate are
known, the TCAS computer outputs a traffic advisory display of bearing, range, and altitude of the nearby aircraft for the flight crew.
If the computer determines that the other aircraft would be an imminent threat and continues on its present flight path, the computer
would output a Resolution Advisory (RA). This display advises the flight crew of recommended vertical maneuvers to avoid the
other aircraft.
4.1.1.2. Figure 4-1 shows representative displays on the TVI-920 indicator. Figure 4-2 shows representative TCAS displays on
the WXI-711 indicator.
4-1
Theory of Operation 523-0820642
Figure 4-1. Representative TVI-920 Display
4-2
Figure 4-2. Representative TCAS Displays on the WXI-711 Indicator
4.1.1.3. In situations where both aircraft are TCAS II equipped, the TCAS computers transmit and receive messages over the mode
S data link of their transponders to coordinate the advised maneuvers of each aircraft. This prevents each TCAS from independently
advising that its aircraft be flown in an avoidance climb, for example, which would continue the traffic conflict.
4.1.1.4. Rockwell Collins TCAS II system consists of a TCAS II transmitter-receiver, two TCAS antennas, two Mode S (or one
Mode S and one non-Mode S) transponders and their associated L-band antennas, a control panel, and TCAS displays.
4.1.2. TCAS II Theory of Operation.
The basic TCAS II system consists of a TTR-920 (TTR-920 cannot be modified for acceptance of Change 7.1.), TTR-921 , or
TTR-2100 TCAS II Transmitter- Receiver; a TRE-920 TCAS II Directional Antenna, two TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicators,
a TTC- 920( ) TCAS II Transponder Control, and two TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponders with their four L-band antennas. Figure
4-3 shows a typical TCAS II system.
4-3
Figure 4-3. Typical TCAS II System
4.1.2.1. TTR-920/-921/-2100. The TTR-920/-921/-2100 contains the transmitter, receiver, computer and control circuits that
are the primary TCAS circuits of the system.
4.1.2.1.1. The two associated TPR-720s, in addition to normally functioning as ATC/Mode S transponders, transmit and receive
TCAS-related data (from the TTR-920/-921/-2100) over the mode S data link. The TTC-920 provides control inputs to both the
TTR-920/-921/-2100 and the transponders. Resolution and traffic advisory information is displayed to the flight crew on the TVI-
920. The TCAS-compatible display may be used in lieu of the TVI-920 to show traffic advisories.
4.1.2.1.2. When a TTR-920/-921/-2100 in a TCAS Il-equipped aircraft transmits an interrogation signal, the transponders in the
aircraft receiving the signal reply. As the reply signal is received by the interrogating aircraft (through the TRE-920 directional an-
tenna), processing circuits in the TTR-920/-921/-2100 determine the direction of the replying aircraft. From the altitude information
encoded in the transponder reply, the TTR-920/-921/-2100 can also determine the reported altitude of the replying aircraft.
4.1.2.1.3. The TTR-920/-921/-2100 uses several replies from the replying aircraft to compute the altitude rate, range rate, and
distance to the other aircraft. This information, along with the direction toward the aircraft, is sufficient for the TTR-920/-921/-2100
to predict the probable flight path of the replying aircraft. Computation of the probable flight path is done by the computer circuits in
the TTR-920/-921/-2100 through the use of algorithms programmed into the computer. (An algorithm is a set of rules or equations
used in processing data.) From the computed data, the TTR-920/-921/-2100 generates a traffic advisory output to the traffic advisory
display. If the predicted flight path of the other aircraft will cause an imminent threat, the TTR-920/- 921/-2100 also outputs a
resolution advisory output to the resolution advisory display.
4.1.2.1.4. TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver. The TTR-920/-921/-2100 contains circuits for receiving,
transmitting, signal processing (including computing), and interfacing with other components of the TCAS II system. A frequency
source generates 1030 s Megahertz (MHz) for the transmitter output and receiver local oscillator. The receiver has four, individual
Radio Frequency (RF) and Intermediate Frequency (IF) sections, one for each of the four directional segments of the TRE-920
directional antenna. At the receiver detector the signals are compared to allow received-signal bearing information to be determined.
The TTR-2100 mounts in a standard ARINC equipment rack in the electronics bay of the aircraft. A typical installation includes
top and bottom-mounted phase-based antennas to support the ACAS function, dual Mode S Transponders, Traffic Display Units,
4-4 Change 1
and flight deck mounted control panels and selector switch. The bottom-mounted antenna is usually a directional antenna, but can
also be an omni-directional antenna.
4.1.2.1.4.1. The transmitter is a six-stage, solid-state circuit that develops 1800 watts. The rf output is applied to a whisper/shout
attenuator that controls the transmitted power applied, through the diplexer, beam steering network and top-/bottom-antenna switch
to the antenna. The beam steering network has a phase-shifter network which generates four outputs from the transmitter rf and
controls their phase relationships. The outputs are connected to the four antenna elements through the top/bottom switch. The phase
of the four output signals shapes and points the beams of radiated RF, or generates an omnidirectional pattern. The top/bottom switch
connects the beam steering network output to either the top or bottom antenna. When an L-band omnidirectional antenna is used on
the bottom of the aircraft, only one switch terminal is connected to the antenna. The other three terminals are unterminated.
4.1.2.1.4.2. A signal processor and Central Processing Unit (CPU) (the computer) provide the control and data analysis necessary
for the TTR-920/-921/-2100 operation. The signal processor circuits serve as a preprocessor between the system software and the RF
circuits. The CPU is made up of three microprocessors and their associated memories. This is the portion of the TTR-920/-921/-2100
that contains the algorithms for analyzing data developed as a result of signals from transponders of other aircraft. The CPU generates
the traffic and resolution advisories for output to the cockpit displays. It is software-controlled and communicates with the signal
processor and input/output interface through the system bus.
The ACAS Computer Unit operates in conjunction with the audio systems on the aircraft to provide prioritized aural alerts based on
detected hazard conditions to the warning function for alert consolidation and forwarding to the Flight Deck Audio System. It also
operates in conjunction with the Displays System on the aircraft using standard ARINC 429 protocol interfaces to provide situational
awareness display information to the flight crew. It communicates to the other aircraft systems using ARINC 429 and discrete signal
interfaces.
4.1.2.1.4.3. The input/output interface circuits are the Analog-to-Digital (A/D) (except TTR-2100), Digital-to-Analog (D/A),
Aeronautical Radio INCorporated ARINC), discrete, and analog circuits that are required to communicate with external TCAS
equipment. The interface has a CPU to control its operation. The ACAS Computer Unit operates in conjunction with the audio
systems on the aircraft to provide prioritized aural alerts based on detected hazard conditions to the warning function for alert con-
solidation and forwarding to the Flight Deck Audio System. It also operates in conjunction with the Displays System on the aircraft
using standard ARINC 429 protocol interfaces to provide situational awareness display information to the flight crew. It communi-
cates to the other aircraft systems using ARINC 429 and discrete signal interfaces.
4.1.2.2. TVI-920 TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator. The TTR-920/-921/-2100 outputs ARINC 429-format signals to the TVI-920
TCAS II VSI/RA/TA Indicator or Weather Radar Indicator that is developing the displays. The data received from the TTR-920/-
921/-2100 is processed through computer circuits to generate the display data. Symbol generators make up the characters to be
shown on the Cathode Ray Tube (CRT). Refer to Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 for typical displays.
4.1.2.2.1. TCAS Compatible Weather Radar Indicator. The TCAS-compatible indicator (for the WXR-700C or WXR-700X
Weather Radar System) may be used optionally as a TCAS traffic advisory display. The indicator processes the input data and
displays it, along with the conventional weather radar display.
4.1.2.2.2. TTC-920 TCAS II Transponder Control. The TTC-920 develops outputs used for controlling the TTR-920/-921/-
2100 and TPR-720/- 900/-901 functions. All signals are in digital format and are carried over an ARINC 429 data bus. Outputs
from the front-panel switches are applied to a CPU that, in turn, addresses locations in PROMS. The PROM outputs are applied
through an interface to the ARINC 429 data bus to be applied to the TPR-720/-9001-901. The TPR-7201- 900/-901 retransmits
control information to the TTR-920/-921/-2100. Refer to Table 3-4 for a listing of the front panel controls and indicators and their
respective functions.
4.1.2.2.3. TPR-720 ATC/Mode S Transponder. The TPR-720 transponder has the capability of operating with mode S in-
terrogators as well as the standard ATCRBS interrogators. The mode S capability permits sending and receiving messages via the
interrogation/reply data link. The TPR-720 has five major functional circuits: transmitter, receiver, signal and message processor,
CPU, and Input/Output (I/O).
4.1.2.2.3.1. The 1030-MHz interrogation data uplinks are applied from the L-band antennas to the receiver. In the receiver, the
signal is mixed with a 1090-MHz output from the local oscillator to produce a 60-MHz IF signal. The IF signal is amplified, detected,
and passed on to the signal and message processor.
4.1.2.2.3.2. The processor decodes the interrogation to extract the message or interrogation request data. This data is input to the
CPU circuits. Here the data is further processed for output through the Input/Output (I/O) circuits to applicable components. The
I/O circuits provide the interface requirements between the CPU and aircraft buses. The CPU circuits also receive data from various
sources (altitude encoders, for example) for processing in preparation to transmit it.
Change 1 4-5
4.1.2.2.3.3. The modulator portion of the transmitter circuits receives the data, or reply, to be transmitted from the signal and
message processor. The 1090-MHz local oscillator Continuous Wave (CW) output is applied to switching diodes. As the modulator
biases these diodes on and off, the resulting 1090-MHz output pulses are further amplified to a level of approximately 600 watts.
The signal is then output through the diplexer to the antenna for transmission. If in mode C operation, the transponder reply will
have added pulses that encode the aircraft altitude. If in mode S, the added pulses may encode such as TCAS coordination data,
TCAS output data, or acknowledgement data.
4.1.2.2.4. TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder. The TPR-900/TPR-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder is a mode S
transponder capable of operating with both ATCRBS and Mode S interrogators (Refer to Figure 4-4). The transponder uses two
antennas for diversity operation. Diversity operation improves the air-to-air surveillance of TCAS. A Mode S feature is the ability
to send and receive data link messages via the reply and interrogation Mode S message formats. The transponder consists of four
principal assemblies: transmitter, receiver, I/O and processor, and power supply.
4.1.2.2.5. Input signals (1030-MHz interrogations/uplinks) are received at one or both of the antennas. The received signal is
pulse-demodulated and sent to processing circuits where the diversity selection is made. Diversity selection determines which
receiver provides the stronger (or first) signal. The selected receiver signal is then applied through a demodulator circuit to the
processing circuits.
Figure 4-4. TPR-900/TPR-901 Simplified Block Diagram
4.1.2.2.6. The processing circuits determine whether the interrogation is an ATCRBS interrogation, a mode S interrogation ad-
dressed to the transponder’s own aircraft, or a mode S interrogation addressed to another aircraft. Depending on the type of in-
terrogation, the processing circuits determine the proper reply (if one is required). Any necessary reply is generated in a message
processing circuit and output to the diversity switching circuits and transmitter modulator. The diversity switching circuits direct
the reply message to the same antenna through which the selected receive signal originated.
4.1.2.2.7. The I/O circuit is an interface to receive serial data from 10 ARINC 429 sources, the 24-bit aircraft-address input, two
Gillham-code altitude inputs, two synchro inputs, and various discretes. The CPU provides the link between the I/O and the signal
processing circuits.
4-6
4.1.2.2.7.1. Power Supply. The power supply is a pulse-width, modulated, switching regulator that develops all the dc voltages
required by the transponder. The ac input is from the aircraft 115- V ac, 400-Hz primary power. Output voltages are +52 V, +30
V, +I2 V, +5 V, and -1 2 V. A +5 V dc feedback is applied to a pulse-width modulator to regulate the input voltage to the two
power transformers. A low-voltage sensor circuit monitors the output voltage to develop the power supply monitor output signal. A
power-on-clear circuit outputs a reset signal each time primary power is applied.
4.1.2.2.7.2. Transmitter. A Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) oscillator generates the 1090-MHz CW signal for the transmitter
and receiver local oscillator frequency, refer to Figure 4-5. The CW signal is applied to a pin diode switch that directs the signal
to the receiver or to the first pulsed amplifier. A bracket modulator, controlled by the processor, provides the control signal for the
diode switch. In the transmit mode, the CW signal is directed to the first pulsed amplifier. After amplification, the signal is applied
to additional pulsed amplifiers switched on and off by the pulse modulator. (The pulse modulation driver signal is an output of the
processor circuits.) The output of the driver stage is applied to a power splitter, amplified again by three parallel power amplifiers,
then recombined to produce a 600-watt (nominal) transmitter signal.
4.1.2.2.7.3. The 1090-MHz transmitter output is applied to the diplexer/diversity switch. When transmission occurs, the diode
associated with the appropriate antenna is briefly turned off to allow the transmitter power to be applied to that antenna. The trans-
mitter output is sampled and detected for use by the power monitors.
Figure 4-5. Transmitter Functional Block Diagram
4.1.2.2.7.4. Receiver. The 1030-MHz interrogation signals are received at either or both of the antennas, refer to Figure 4-6.
These signals are passed through the diplexer/diversity switch in the transmitter assembly then applied to the receiver. Filtering at
the receiver interconnect reduces the susceptibility to High Intensity Radio Frequency (HIRF) signals. In the receiver assembly, the
signals are amplified and applied to a pair of mixers. A 1090-MHz local oscillator injection signal (from the transmitter) produces
a 60-MHz IF. The Intermediate Frequency (IF) signal is applied through a series of amplifiers to provide the video output to video
processing circuits on card A4. The IF signal is also applied through the diversity select circuit to the Differential Phase Shift
Keying (DPSK) demodulator. Output from the demodulator is applied to the message processor on card A4.
4-7
Figure 4-6. Receiver Functional Block Diagram
4-8
4.1.2.2.7.5. Signal Processing. The signal processing circuits consist of the video processor, Pulse Amplitude Modula-
tion (PAM) decoder, message processor, and timing/diversity logic circuit, refer to Figure 4-7. The video processor receives the
detected video from the top and bottom receiver sections and processes it to determine pulse amplitude and relative amplitude
between PI and P2, and P3 and P4 pulses. If the signal amplitude is less than -78 Decibel(s) referenced to 1 milliwatt (dBm), the
signal is not passed. If the relative amplitude of P2 or P4, with respect to PI or P3, is 6 dB or less, the P2 and P4 pulses are not
passed. The decoder detects pulse width and spacing to determine the type of interrogation. Failure to receive the proper spacing
or pulse width will cause the decoder to reset and wait for the next pulse. The decoder output to the message processor is used to
select the appropriate reply.
4-9
Figure 4-7. Signal Processing Block Diagram
4-10
4.1.2.2.7.6. Input/Output Circuits. The Input/Output (I/O) circuits contain the interfaces for the discrete, serial, and synchro
inputs and outputs applied at the rear connector. It also contains the nonvolatile memory used to store fault data used during trou-
bleshooting. Eight of the serial inputs and all the serial outputs conform to ARINC 429 characteristics. Two serial buses, for digital
altitude data, conform to ARINC 575 characteristics. Two altitude-data, synchro inputs are standard XYZ synchro signals (a coarse
and fine synchro for each of the two altitude inputs). These signals are converted to digital and, along with other digital-data inputs,
are multiplexed as necessary and applied to the data bus through the ARINC gate array. Output signals are taken from the data buses,
applied through the ARINC gate array to line drivers, and output to the rear connector. Lightning protection is applied to the I/O
functions on card A4.
4-11/(4-12 Blank)
523-0820642
CHAPTER 5
Maintenance
5.1. GENERAL.
This chapter contains procedures necessary to assure proper post-installation system operation. It also contains troubleshooting
procedures sufficient to isolate faults to the Line Replaceable Unit (LRU).
5.2. TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING.

5.2.1. Adjustment/Test.
The post-installation test procedures are divided into two sections, one for the TPR-720/TPR- 900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder
system and one for the Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance Systerm (TCAS). These procedures assure that the equipment is properly
installed and operational. In addition to the post-installation test procedures a TCAS interface test procedure is provided. These
procedures provide additional information to allow testing of specific functions/interfaces of the TCAS system.
5.2.2. Post-Installation Procedures.
After the equipment has been mounted in the aircraft, do the operational checks given in Paragraph 5.2.2.3, Paragraph 5.2.2.4, and
Paragraph 5.2.3. (The post-installation tests are divided into tests for the transponder, TCAS, and interfacing equipment.) These
tests are written assuming that primary power is supplied by the aircraft with the engines operating, or with auxiliary power applied
to the aircraft.
5.2.2.1. Test Equipment Required. Refer to Table 5-1 for a list of special tools, fixtures, and test equipment that is required
to perform the post-installation test. The listed minimum use specifications are the minimum requirements of the test equipment
to perform the necessary test procedures on the system. A representative manufacturer and model of equipment is listed. Other
equipment may be entirely satisfactory if it meets the specifications and is calibrated as necessary. Refer to Figure 5-1 for the
Antenna Attenuator Cap Fabrication Drawing.
5.2.2.1.1. Be careful when using ramp testers for TCAS and/or transponder testing. The rf strength between the IFR and TCAS or
transponder can be variable or intermittent, depending on testing conditions. This variability can occur when using either antenna
radiation, or a coaxial cable, to connect the IFR, and can adversely affect the result of a test.
5.2.2.1.2. One reason the signal strength can affect tests in some cases is the lack of a Clear of Conflict (CoC) message. A CoC
annunciation is not issued when the intruder is dropped. A CoC annunciation is issued only for continuously tracked intruders that
maintain an rf signal.
5.2.2.1.3. A target can be dropped in either of the cases that follow:
• Inadequate rf link between the IFR and TCAS. An important difference between mode-c and mode-s intruder tracking, is that
mode-s uses power programming. Power programming means that the strength of the transmitted rf interrogation signal from the
TCAS gets smaller as the mode-s intruder gets closer. A good test setup for an intruder at 10 nmi may not be good for the same
intruder at 3 nmi, because TCAS reduces the transmit rf interrogation signal power for closer targets. The IFR may not receive
the weaker TCAS interrogation signal when the simulated intruder gets closer. If the IFR does receive the interrogation signal, it
does not respond. When the TCAS does not receive a response, it "coasts" the intruder target, and then drops it. This drop will
not cause a CoC annunciation.
• Unrealistic scenario with the IFR. When testing with the IFR, an intruder approaches until it is at zero range, and then the intruder
instantly changes direction and its range increases. This is unrealistic. The sudden change in direction can confuse the tracker,
because a tracker inside the TCAS does not expect the intruder to get to zero range. This confusion can cause the TCAS to drop
the target at zero range, and then reacquire the target again. This drop will not cause a CoC annunciation. If the intruder approach
is slow enough, this effect can be reduced. The effect can be different between mode-c and mode-s.
5.2.2.1.4. A Unit Under Test (UUT)-requirement-to-test-resource-capability ratio of 1 : 1 was used to derive all accuracy param-
eter characteristics. The facility performing the test should use test equipment with capability that exceeds the identified accuracy
characteristic in accordance with applicable local test and measurement integrity control practices.
5-1
Maintenance 523-0820642
Table 5-1. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment.
GENERIC MINIMUM USE SPECIFICAT1ON REPRESENTATIVE TYPE MA1NT

NAME (MFG, MODEL/OPTIONS) LEVEL
NO FUNCTION/PA- CHARACTERISTIC
CODE
RAMETER
Transponder 1.0 Interrogation Modes A, C, and S; IFR Systems Inc model ATC-601, I
ramp test set modes including Air Traffic or Tel Instruments model T-48,
(including remote Control Radar Beacon Model IFR-6000 by Cobham/
test antenna) System (ATCRBS) - Aeroflex/ IFR, Mode S/A/C
only all-call, and mode Transponder Ramp Test Set
S all-call formats 4, 5,
11
2.0 Display of reported a. mode S address
information b. Altitude
c. ATC code
d. True Airspeed
3.0 Mode S address Selectable invalid mode
S address
4.0 P2 pulse amplitude Variable, -9 dB and 0
dB
5.0 Measurement of
UUT
5.1 Reply Frequency 1089 to 1091
Megahertz (MHz)
±50 kHz
5.2 Effective Radiated +50 to +57 Decibel(s)
Power referenced to 1
milliwatt (dBm)
5.3 Mode A/C mtl -73 dBm ±5 dB
5.4 Mode S mtl -74 dBm ±4 dB
5.5 Squitter Rate 1 to 2 Seconds
5.6 Reply Efficiency 0 to 100%
TCAS ramp test set 1.0 RF Output Model IFR-6000 by Cobham/

(including remote Aeroflex/ IFR, or Model
test antenna) TCAS-201 by IFR/ Aeroflex
1.1 Frequency 1090 MHz ±20 kHz
1.2 Signal Range 5 to 500 ft
2.0 Reply Modes C (with altitude
reporting )
S (with formats 0, 11,
16)
5-2
Table 5-1. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment. - Continued

CODE
RAMETER
2.1 Reply pulse-width ±50 ns
and spacing
accuracy
2.2 Reply pulse levels ±1 dB relative to P1
3.0 Scenario
parameters
3.1 Range 5 and 10 ±0.l nmi,
selectable
3.2 Range rate 0 and +250 ±10 kts,
selectable
3.3 Altitude 0 to +50 000 ft, variable
in 100-ft increments
3.4 Altitude rate 0 ±10 fpm
Pitot-static Ramp 1.0 Pressure altitude 0 thru 50 000 ft, Milhard Engineering Co, Air Data I
Test Set adjustable in 100-ft Tester, model 127-1 M-2
increments
Radio Altimeter 1.0 Radio altitude 0 thru 2500 ft; Various; determined by I
Test Set adjustable in 100-ft manufacturer of radio altimeter
increments system
RF load :2 or 4 1.0 Impedance 50 Ώ ±10% Aeroflex Weinschel medium power I
used) or equivalent
2.0 Attenuation 2 0 ±l dB
3.0 Power dissipation 2 W, cw; 500 W, pk
4.0 Frequency range 1000 to 1100 MHz,
±0.5 dB
Antenna 1.0 Signal attenuation Approx. 6.5 dB Locally fabricated. Refer to Figure I
Attenuator Cap at 1020 thru 1100 5-1.
MHz
Electrically 1.0 Conductivity 0.001 Ώ/in2, max Minnesota Mining and I
Conductive, through tape Manufacturing Co, type X-1181
Pressure-Sensitive thickness
Tape
2.0 Width 1 in, or wider
RF terminations 1.0 Voltage Mini Circuits, type STRM-50
Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR)
measurement
1.1 Impedance 50 ohm
5-3
Table 5-1. Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment. - Continued

CODE
RAMETER
1.2 Frequency range DC - 2000 MHz
(MHz)
1.3 Return loss dc to 500 MHz, 40 dB
dc to 1000 MHz, 35 dB
dc to 2000 MHz, 26 dB
NOTE
Load for the other three ports when making VSWR measurements on one port
Adapter 1.0 Aeronautical ITT Cannon, Part No
Radio, 349-1042-000
INCorporated
(ARINC) 600 to
SMA adapter
5-4
Figure 5-1. Antenna Attenuator Cap Fabrication Drawing (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-5/(5-6 Blank)
Figure 5-1. Antenna Attenuator Cap Fabrication Drawing (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-7/(5-8 Blank)
5.2.2.2. Aircraft Strapping Configuration.
NOTE
The signal in 3.(b) below is commonly controlled by a microswitch actuated by the weight of the aircraft being
placed on the landing gear. When the landing gear is down and the weight of the aircraft is resting on it, the
microswitch (squat switch) enables a relay that connects the on-ground signal to RMP-5K. The on-ground signal
can be placed in the logic 1 (in-air) condition by opening the circuit breaker that connects power to the relay coil.
In several tests throughout this section, knowledge of system strapping is required. Prior to beginning the tests, the technician should
determine the following information.
1. Aircraft Mode S Address.
2. Transponder Interconnections. On-ground ATCRBS reply inhibit: TP-5J (or TP-5K) to control panel J1-15 (or J2-15). If TP-5J
is connected, the transponder ATCRBS replies are inhibited when the aircraft is in the on-ground condition. (Refer to the note
at Paragraph 5.2.2.2.) If TP-5K is connected, the replies are not inhibited.
3. TCAS Transmitter-Receiver Interconnections.
(a) On-ground Standby (STBY) mode: RBP-7E to RBP-7K. If interconnected, the TCAS automatically switches to the
standby mode when the aircraft is in the on-ground condition.
(b) On-ground/in-air status: RMP-5K to logic 0 (<I 0 kR or +I 8.5 to +36 V dc). When at logic 0, the aircraft is in the
on-ground condition. When at logic 1 the aircraft is in the in-air condition.
(c) Self-test inhibit: RBP-8E to RBP-7K.
(d) Aircraft altitude limit: RMP-6E, -6F, -6G, -6H, and -6J to RMP-6K. Interconnection, individually or in any
combination, indicates the altitude above which the aircraft cannot achieve a 1500-ft/min climb rate. This altitude is
the sum of the selected-pin altitude values.
RMP-6K Altitude
and
RMP-6E 2000 ft
RMP-6F 4000 ft
RMP-6G 8000 ft
RMP-6H 16 000 ft
RMP-6J 32 000 ft
(e) Climb inhibit: RMP-1 J, RMP-I3G, RBP-5J, and RBP-5K. If RMP-1 J and -1 3G, or RBP-5J and -5K are connected
to other systems, the 1500-ft/min climb inhibit is enabled.
(f) Increased climb inhibit: RBP-5E, RBP-5F, RBP-5G, and RB. If RBP-5E and -5F, or RBP-5G and -5H are connected
to other systems, the 2500-ft/min climb inhibit is enabled.
(g) Advisory inhibits: RBP-5A, -5B, -5C, or -5D to ground. These inputs inhibit normal TCAS operation during other
hazardous conditions (wind shear, ground proximity, etc). If RBP-5A is grounded, the TCAS system will automatically
switch to standby. If any of the other pins are connected to other systems, the TCAS will automatically switch to the
TA-only mode and inhibit the voice messages when those systems generate warnings. An open at all pins results in
normal TCAS operation.
5-9
5.2.2.3. TPR-720/TPR-900/-901 ATC/Mode S Transponder.
1. EXERCISE CARE IN OPERATING THE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM AT PRESSURE ALTI-

TUDES OTHER THAN THE LOCAL AIRPORT PRESSURE ALTITUDE. OPERATION AT OTHER
PRESSURE ALTITUDES COULD CAUSE FALSE RESOLUTION OR TRAFFIC ADVISORIES IN
TCAS-EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT OPERATING IN THE VICINITY OF THE AIRCRAFT UNDER TEST.
OPERATING THE TRANSPONDER AT PRESSURE ALTITUDES OTHER THAN THE LOCAL
AIRPORT PRESSURE ALTITUDE HAS THE POTENTIAL TO CAUSE SERIOUS AIRCRAFT
ACCIDENTS.
2. DO NOT SET THE ATC CODE TO EMERGENCY CODES 7600,7700 OR 7777 WHEN PERFORM-
ING ANY OF THE FOLLOWING TESTS. DOING SO MAY SET OFF EMERGENCY ALARMS IN THE
AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM OF THE AIRPORT WHICH HAS THE POTENTIAL TO CAUSE
SERIOUS AIRCRAFT ACCIDENTS.
NOTE
The following test procedure assumes the use of a TTC-920 TCAS Transponder Control. Some control panel
functions may be different or not available if another type of control is used.
Do the following test procedure.

a. On the control panel, select the XPDR mode; transponder to be tested, 1/L (or 2/R); ATC code (code 1200 is recommended)
and set altitude reporting to ALT (on) or ALT 1/L (or 2/R).
b. On the TPR-720 transponder, push and release the front panel test switch. Make sure of the following.
(1) All lamps come on for approximately 1 second.
(2) All lamps go off momentarily.
(3) TPR PASS lamp comes on.
(4) TPR PASS lamp goes off approximately 10 seconds after the TEST button is released.
c. On the TPR-900/-901 transponder, push and release the front panel test switch.
d. Verify the following.
(1) All lamps turn red for 2 seconds, then the LRU status turns green and the other lamps remain red for 2 seconds.
(2) All lamps then go dark for 2 seconds.
(3) The test results are then displayed for 30 seconds.
e. On the control panel, momentarily select the TEST position, or press and release the TEST push button.
f. Make sure of the following.
(1) The code readout displays 8888 for 1 second.
(2) The ATC FAIL lamp comes on for approximately 1 second, and then goes off and remains off.
g. Place the aircraft in a simulated in-air condition.
NOTE
The aircraft can be simulated to be in the air by opening the circuit breaker that powers the on-ground/in-air relay
actuated by the landing gear squat switch.
h. Position the transponder ramp test set so it will interrogate the top transponder antenna only. Interrogate the system using an
ATCRBS mode Aircraft (A/C) interrogation, then a mode S interrogation, and make sure of the following for each mode.
5-10
(1) Reply frequency is 1090 ±l MHz.

(2) Peak power output is between 51.0 dBm (125 watts) and 57.0 dBm (500 watts).
(3) Mode A/C Minimum Triggering Level (MTL) is -73 dBm ±4 dB, and mode S MTL is -74 dBm ±3 dB. The difference
between mode A MTL and mode C MTL should be no more than 1 dB.
(4) Squitter transmission occurs approximately every 2 seconds.
NOTE
If the test set is positioned to receive responses from both transponder antennas, the squitter transmission will
occur approximately every second.
(5) When using mode A and mode C interrogations, including the P2 side lobe suppression pulse, valid replies are received
when the relative amplitude of P2 is set to -9 dB. Make sure that the reply efficiency is not greater than 10% when the
amplitude of P2 is set to 0 dB.
(6) Antenna diversity isolation is equal to or greater than 20 dB.
i. Position the transponder ramp test set so it will interrogate the bottom transponder antenna only. Position the transponder ramp
test set so it will interrogate the bottom transponder antenna only.
j. Repeat steps h. (1) through (6), interrogating the bottom antenna.
NOTE
Test steps k through y may be performed by interrogating the transponder using either the top or bottom transpon-
der antenna.
k. Select the test set function, which displays the received mode S address. Make sure that the ATC/Mode S transponder is re-
porting its correct mode S address.
NOTE
Each aircraft has a unique, preassigned address for mode S.
l. Select the test set function, which transmits an address that is different from the received mode S address Step 5.2.2.3.k. Make
sure that the ATC/Mode S transponder does not respond to the mode S address.
m. Interrogate the ATC/Mode S transponder with a mode S only all-call format 11 and make sure that the correct mode S address
and capability are reported in the reply.
n. Interrogate the ATC Mode S transponder with mode S uplink formats (UF) 4 and 5. The reported aircraft altitude in a reply to
a UF4 should match, within 125 feet, which is displayed on the aircraft altimeter (set to 29.92). The reported code in a reply to
a UF5 should match that displayed by the control panel.
o. Interrogate the ATC/Mode S transponder with ATCRBS/mode A/S and C/S all-call formats and make sure that the correct
address and aircraft altitude are reported in the respective replies.
p. Interrogate the ATC/Mode S transponder with an ATCRBS-only all-call format and make sure that no reply is received.
q. Interrogate the ATC/Mode S transponder with an ATCRBS mode A and mode C format and make sure that the Air Traffic
Control (ATC) code reported matches that set on the control panel and the altitude reported matches within 125 feet of that
displayed on the aircraft altimeter (set to 29.92).
r. Repeat step (p) with the altitude source switch set to the alternate altitude source if installed.
s. Set the ATC code to the complement of the previously selected ATC code. Repeat step p and make sure that the ATC code is
correct.
5-11
NOTE
To find the complement of the ATC code, subtract the first code from 7777 (For code 1200, the complement is
6577.)
t. Push the IDENT button and make sure that the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse is decoded at the test set and remains
for 15 to 25 seconds.
NOTE
If the source of altitude information provided to the transponder has been repaired or replaced, perform steps u
through y.
u. Test the altitude encoding function by simulating the following pressure altitudes as a minimum with the Pitot-static system
test set:
0 ft 2800 ft 25 000 ft
1000 ft 6800 ft 30 800 ft
1100 ft 14 800 ft 35 000 ft
1300ft 16 000 ft 40 000 ft
1800ft 18 000 ft Max Operating

Altitude
2600 ft 22 000 ft
(1) Make sure that the altitude displayed on the altimeter (set to 29.92) matches within 125 feet of the altitude transmitted by
the transponder and that displayed on the test set during both ascent and descent.
(2) If the maximum service ceiling is below 40 000 feet, conduct the test to the altitude nearest to, but not exceeding, the
service ceiling, and then test at the maximum operating altitude.
v. Set the altitude reporting switch on the control panel to ALT OFF and make sure that altitude information is no longer being
decoded by the ramp test set. Set the altitude reporting switch to the ALT on or ALT 1/L (or 2/R) position again.
w. While doing step (1), below, do step (2), below.
(1) Interrogate the transponder and make sure that the maximum true airspeed is identical to that programmed at the ATC
Mode S Transponder rear connector.
(2) Place the aircraft in a simulated on-ground condition. Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, (Step f. (2)), and make sure that the
transponder continues to reply to mode A and mode C interrogations if air/ground input TP-5K is used and ceases to reply
to mode A and mode C interrogations if air/ground input TP-5J is used.
NOTE
The transponder will continue to transmit mode S squitter information and respond to mode S interrogations when
on the ground.
x. For installations with Flight ID capability, enter a Flight ID code into the aircraft’s Flight ID control source. Interrogate the
transponder using the test set’s Flight ID test. Make sure that the Flight ID code displayed on the test set matches the code
entered in the control source.
NOTE
ARINC 718A transponders will remove any space characters and left-justify the remaining characters.
5-12
y. If the correct results are obtained in steps (a) through (y), Paragraph 5.2.2.3, the system is operating correctly. If incorrect
results are obtained, refer to Figure 5-2, the TCAS system fault isolation procedures.
5.2.2.4. TCAS System. This test uses the TTR-920/-921/-2100 Built-In Test Equipment (BITE) functions to make sure of the
system operation.
NOTE
1. The following procedures assume the use of a TTC-920 TCAS Transponder Control and a TVI-920 TCAS
VSI/RA/TA Indicator. If a particular function is not available on the TTC-920 or TVI-920, ignore that test step
and proceed to the next. Some control panel and indicator functions and/or displays may be different if another
type of control or indicator is used.
2. All systems interfacing with the TCAS system must be operational when performing this test.
a. Select the TA/RA mode, transponder 1/L (or 2/R) and altitude reporting to the ALT on or ALT 1/L (or 2/R) position on the
control panel.
b. Set the ABOVE-N-BELOW switch to the N (normal) position.
NOTE
In the following tests, other aircraft operating in the vicinity of the aircraft being tested may result in traffic being
displayed on the TVI-920. If the TCAS system determines that this traffic is a traffic advisory, then the aircraft
traffic symbol/data tag and the mode message will be displayed in yellow. Since an RA or TA will put the indicator
into the traffic mode, this will prevent selection of the pop-up mode of operation.
c. Observe the captain’s and first-officer’s VSI/RA/TA indicators and make sure that they are displaying the vertical speed scale,
pointer and legend VERT SPEED X1000 Feet Per Minute (FPM). (Push and release the M (mode) button on the indicator if
traffic is being displayed.)
d. Push and release the M (mode) button on each indicator. Make sure that: the VERT SPEED X1000 FPM legend is replaced
by an aircraft symbol and range ring, the message ONLY TA shows in the upper left corner, and the message 6NM (or 12NM)
shows in the upper right corner of the display.
e. Push and release the R (range) button and make sure that the range message changes to 12NM (or 6NM), and that the range
ring is reduced (expanded) in size. Select the 6 NM range.
f. At the TTR-920/-921/-2100 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver, do a test of the TCAS system by pushing and releasing the front panel
test switch. Make sure of the following:
NOTE
Some system red Light-Emitting Diode (LED) lamps may come on momentarily but will go off before the end of
the test. The TTR PASS lamp (green LED) should be the only lamp on when the test ends.
(1) All lamps come on for approximately 1 second.

(2) All lamps go off momentarily.
(3) TTR PASS lamp comes on.
(4) TTR PASS lamp goes off approximately 10 seconds after the TEST button is released.
g. On the ATC control panel, momentarily select the TEST position or push and release the TEST button. Make sure that the
following shows on the control panel and on the two VSI/RA/TA indicators.
NOTE
The test pattern will continue to show, as long as the test switch/push-button is held in TEST. The audio message
will not occur until after the switch/push-button is released.
5-13
(1) The code readout shows 8888 for 1 second.

(2) The ATC FAIL lamp comes on for 1 second, and then goes off and remains off.
(3) The TEST message shows in the lower center of the indicator under the airplane symbol.
(4) An RA test pattern shows adjacent to the VSI scale as follows:
• Red arc from +2000 to +6000, or the greatest positive vertical rate shows
• Red arc from 0 to -6000, or the greatest negative vertical rate shows
• Green arc from 0 to approximately +300.
(5) A traffic test pattern shows in the center of the indicator as follows:
• RA intruder (solid red square), 2 nmi distance, +90 degrees bearing (3 o’clock position), and with a relative altitude of
+02 (+200 ft); shows above the intruder symbol.
• TA intruder (solid yellow circle), 2 nmi distance, -90 degrees bearing (9 o’clock position), and with a relative altitude
of -02 (-200 ft); shows below the intruder symbol with an up arrow to the right of the intruder symbol.
• Proximity intruder (solid cyan diamond), 3.6 nmi distance, +35 degrees bearing (1 o’clock position), and with a relative
altitude of -10 (1 000 ft); shows below the intruder symbol with a down arrow to the right of the intruder symbol.
• Other intruder (open cyan diamond), 3.6 nmi distance, -35 degrees bearing (11 o’clock position), and with a relative
altitude of +10 (+1000 ft); shows above the intruder symbol.
(6) The indicator reverts back to the normal traffic display after eight seconds.
(7) The aural annunciation “TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK occurs at the end of the self-test sequence.
h. Select the TA ONLY mode on the control panel and repeat Step g.
i. Set the ABOVE-N-BELOW switch to the ABOVE position. The message ABV shows in the upper-right corner of the display
below the range message.
j. Set the ABOVE-N-BELOW switch to the BELOW position. The message BLW shows in the upper-right corner of the display
below the range message. Return the switch to the N (normal) position.
k. Select the TA ONLY mode on the control panel and repeat Step k.
l. Set the altitude reporting switch ALT/OFF or ALT 1/L (or 2/R) to the OFF position and make sure that the Vertical Speed
Indicator (VSI) shows the TCAS OFF message in the upper right corner and no traffic shows on the indicator. Return the
altitude switch to ALT on or ALT 1/L (or 2/R) position.
m. Select the XPDR mode and make sure that the VSI shows the TCAS OFF message in the upper right corner and no traffic shows
on the indicator.
n. Select the STBY mode and make sure that the VSI shows the TCAS OFF message in the upper right corner and no traffic shows
on the indicator.
o. If the correct results are obtained in steps a through n, the system is operating correctly. If incorrect results are obtained, refer
to the Figure 5-2 troubleshooting procedures.
5.2.3. TCAS Svstem-Interface Tests.
The following TCAS system-interface test procedure is divided into individual tests for specific functions. These may be used to
supplement the previous post-installation test procedures. Procedures to be performed may be individually selected. All others may
be omitted. Initial system setup procedures are referenced at the beginning of each test procedure and must be performed prior to
performing any other test step in the procedure. It is not necessary to perform the procedures in their numbered order; however,
lettered steps within each numbered procedure are intended to be performed in order.
5-14
EXERCISE CARE IN OPERATING THE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM AT PRESSURE ALTITUDES

OTHER THAN THE LOCAL AIRPORT PRESSURE ALTITUDE. OPERATION AT OTHER
ACCIDENTS.
NOTE
In the following tests, other aircraft operating in the vicinity of the aircraft being tested may result in traffic being
displayed on the VSI/RA/TA. If the TCAS system determines that this traffic is a TA or an RA advisory, then
the aircraft traffic symbol/data tag and the mode message will be displayed as appropriate. Since the RA or TA
will place the traffic indicator into the traffic mode, this will prevent selection of the pop-up mode of operation on
indicators having that function.
5.2.3.1. The procedures assume the use of a TTC-920 TCAS Transponder Control and a TVI-920 TCAS VSI/RA/TA Indicator. If
a particular function is not available on the TTC-920 or TVI- 920, ignore that test step and proceed to the next. Some control panel
and indicator functions and/or displays may be different if another control or indicator is used.
5.2.3.2. Initial TCAS System Setup. To avoid causing false resolution or traffic advisories, it is recommended that the transpon-
der antennas be disconnected and the coaxial cables from the transponder be terminated in 50-Ω loads. (Refer to the previous warn-
ing.)
5.2.4. On-Ground Display Operation.
This test verifies TCAS display operation when the aircraft is on the ground. Determine the aircraft wiring interconnection to TTR-
920/-921/-2100 rear connector pin RBP-7E. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2. Step b. (1).)
a. Perform the initial TCAS system setup given in Paragraph 5.2.3.2
b. Place the aircraft in a simulated on-ground condition. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2. Step .3. (b).)
c. If RBP-7E is connected to RBP-7K, make sure that the VSI/RA/TA indicators show the message TCAS OFF in the upper-right
corner of the display.
d. If RBP-7E is not connected to RBP-7K Program Common, make sure that the VSI/RA/TA indicators show the message ONLY
TA in the upper-left corner of the display.
5.2.5. Self-Test In-Air Inhibit Operation.
This self test makes sure of the proper operation of the TCAS when the aircraft is in the air.
NOTE
Refer to Step 5.2.2.4.g.(5) through Step 5.2.2.4.g.(7).
a. Do the initial TCAS system setup given in Paragraph 5.2.3.2.

b. If RBP-8E is connected to RBP-7K (refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2. Step 3.(c).), select the TEST mode or push the TEST push-
button on the control panel. Make sure that the VSI/RA/TA indicators do not show the TCAS self-test pattern.
c. If RBP-8E is not connected to RBP-7K, select the TEST mode or push the TEST button on the control panel and make sure
that the VSI/RA/TA indicators do show the TCAS self-test pattern.
5.2.6. Heading Interface.
This test verifies the heading interface to the TCAS system, if installed.
5-15
b. Simulate a loss of heading data to the TCAS system by opening the appropriate heading system circuit breaker
c. Make sure that the TCAS system continues to operate normally.
d. Close the heading system circuit breaker and make sure that the TCAS system continues to operate normally.
5.2.7. Dual Radio Altimeter System Failure Monitoring.
This test verifies the failure displays on the TCAS system due to loss of the radio altimeter system inputs when a dual radio altimeter
system is installed on the aircraft.
b. Simulate a loss of radio altitude input No. 1 to the TCAS system by opening the No. 1 radio altimeter circuit breaker.
c. Make sure that the TCAS system continues to operate normally.
d. Simulate a loss of radio altitude input No. 2 to the TCAS system by opening the No. 2 radio altimeter circuit breaker.
e. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message and that traffic is removed from the display.
f. Close the No. 1 radio altitude circuit breaker and make sure that TCAS returns to normal operation.
g. Close the No. 2 radio altitude circuit breaker.
5.2.8. Single Radio Altimeter System Failure Monitoring.
This test verifies the failure displays on the TCAS system due to loss of the radio altimeter system inputs when a single radio altimeter
system is installed on the aircraft.
a. Perform the initial TCAS system setup given in Paragraph 5.2.3.2.
b. Simulate a loss of radio altitude input to the TCAS system by opening the radio altimeter circuit breaker.
c. Verify that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message and that traffic is removed from the display.
d. Close the radio altimeter circuit breaker and make sure that TCAS returns to normal operation.
5.2.9. Dual Transponder System Failure Monitoring.
This test verifies the failure displays on the TCAS system due to loss of the transponder system inputs when two ATC/mode S
transponders are installed on the aircraft.
a. Perform the initial TCAS system setup given in Paragraph 5.2.3.2.
b. Open the No. 1 transponder system primary power circuit breaker.
c. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show the TCAS OFF mode, and that traffic is removed from the display.
d. Open the No. 2 transponder system primary power circuit breaker.
e. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message.
f. Close the No. 2 transponder system circuit breaker.
g. Make sure that the TCAS indicators Make sure the TCAS OFF mode.
h. Close the No. 1 transponder system circuit breaker.
i. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
5.2.10. Single Transponder System Failure Monitoring.
These steps test the failure displays on the TCAS system due to loss of the transponder system input, when a single ATC/mode S
transponder is installed on the aircraft.
b. Open the No. 1 transponder system circuit breaker.
c. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message, and that traffic is removed from the display.
d. Close the No. 1 transponder system circuit breaker.
e. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
5-16
5.2.11. Barometric Altimeter System Failure Monitoring.

This test verifies the failure displays on the TCAS system due to loss of the barometric altimeter system inputs.
b. If the aircraft under test has two ATC/mode S transponders installed, open the No. 2 transponder system circuit breaker.
c. Simulate a loss of barometric altitude information to the transponder by opening the selected altitude source circuit breaker.
d. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message, and that traffic is removed from the display.
NOTE
If no alternate source of barometric altitude is available, go to to Step k, below.
e. On the control panel, select the alternate source of barometric altitude information by setting the altitude reporting switch to
the 2 (or R) position. (On some aircraft this switch may be located elsewhere on the flight deck.)
f. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
g. Simulate a loss of the selected barometric altitude information to the transponder by opening the selected altitude source circuit
breaker.
h. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message and that traffic is removed from the display.
i. Close the selected barometric altitude source circuit breaker and make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
j. On the control panel, select the original source of altitude information by setting the altitude reporting switch to the 1 (or L)
position, and make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message, and that traffic is removed from the display.
k. Close the selected barometric altitude source circuit breaker, and make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
l. On the control panel, set the altitude reporting switch to the OFF or center position.
m. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show the TCAS OFF mode, and that traffic is removed from the display.
n. On the control panel, set the altitude reporting switch to the ON or 1 (or L) position.
o. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
NOTE
If the aircraft under test has two ATC/mode S transponders installed, do the following steps p. through s.
p. Close the No. 2 transponder circuit breaker, and open the No. 1 transponder circuit breaker.
q. On the control panel, select the alternate transponder by setting the transponder select switch to 2 (or R).
r. Repeat steps b. through o, above.
s. Close the No. 1 transponder circuit breaker and select the No. 1 transponder by setting the transponder select switch to the 1
(or L) position on the control panel.
5.2.12. VSI/RA/TA Indicator Failure Monitoring.
This test verifies system operation with failure of the VSI/RA/TA indicators.
b. Open the No. 1 VSI/RA/TA indicator circuit breaker.
c. Make sure that all information is removed from the No. 1 VSI/RA/TA indicator and that the No. 2 VSI/RA/TA indicator
continues to operate normally.
d. Open the No. 2 VSI/RA/TA indicator circuit breaker.
e. Make sure that all information is removed from the No. 2 VSI/RA/TA indicator.
f. Close the No. 1 and No. 2 VSI/RA/TA indicator circuit breakers.
5-17
g. Open and close the TCAS system circuit breaker.

h. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
5.2.13. VSI/RA Indicators With Separate Traffic Indicator Failure Monitoring.
This test verifies system operation with failure of the VSI/RA indicators and a separate traffic indicator. Perform this test if resolution
information is provided on the VSI and traffic information is provided on a separate indicator.
b. Open the No. 1 VSI/RA indicator circuit breaker.
c. Make sure that all information is removed from the No. 1 VSI/RA indicator and that the No. 2 VSI/RA indicator and traffic
indicator continue to operate normally.
d. Open the No. 2 VSI/RA indicator circuit breaker.
e. Make sure that all information is removed from the No. 2 VSI/RA indicator.
f. Make sure that the traffic indicator shows a yellow TCAS FAIL, and that all traffic information is removed from the indicator.
g. On the control panel, select the TA or TA ONLY mode.
h. Make sure that the traffic indicator shows the TA ONLY mode and traffic information.
i. Close the No. 1 and No. 2 VSI/RA indicator circuit breakers.
j. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
k. On the control panel, select the TA/RA mode.
l. Open the traffic indicator circuit breaker, and make sure that the VSI/RA indicators continue to operate normally.
5.2.14. TCAS Transmitter-Receiver Failure Monitoring.
This test checks the operation of the TCAS transmitter-receiver monitors.
b. Open the TCAS transmitter-receiver circuit breaker.
c. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS fail message and that all traffic is removed from the display.
d. Reset the TCAS transmitter-receiver circuit breaker.
e. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
5.2.15. Radio Altimeter Interface.

ACCIDENTS.
This test checks the interface between the radio altimeter system and the TCAS system, including the TCAS radio altitude inhibits.
b. If the aircraft under test has two radio altimeter systems installed, disable the No. 2 system by opening the No. 2 system circuit
breaker.
c. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft pressure altitude to 350 feet as read on the altimeter indicator (set to 29.92).
d. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to 350 feet.
5-18
e. Place the aircraft in a simulated on-ground condition. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step 3 (b).)
f. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show a yellow TCAS FAIL message and that traffic is removed from the display.
g. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to 0 feet.
h. Make sure that the TCAS FAIL message has been removed, and the TCAS display shows TA ONLY.
i. Place the aircraft in a simulated in-air condition. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step 3. (b).)
j. Make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
k. Position the TCAS ramp test set antenna at 0 relative bearing to the aircraft. Set the test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with
the following parameters.
Intruder type: Mode S

Range: 5.00 nmi
Range rate: +250 knots
Altitude: 500 ft
l. Start the TCAS ramp test set scenario, and watch the VSIs. Make sure that the intruder symbol changes from an other, to a
proximate, and then to a TA symbol. The annunciation TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC doesl not sound when the intruder changes from
a proximate to a TA intruder.
m. Watch the intruder symbol as it tracks in to the aircraft symbol. Make sure that it does not change to an RA, and that no
resolution advisory information is provided.
n. When the intruder symbol reaches 0 distance, watch that it reverses direction and track outbound. Terminate the scenario at
this point.
o. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft pressure altitude to 1150 feet as read on the altimeter indicator (set to 29.92).
p. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to 1150 feet.
q. Set the TCAS ramp test to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Altitude: 1 050 ft
Altitude rate: +0 ft/min
r. Make sure that the ONLY TA mode message has been removed, and that no mode message shows.
NOTE
The TA/RA mode is not annunciated.
s. Start the test set scenario and watch the VSI indicators. Make sure that the intruder symbol changes from an other, to a proxi-
mate, and then to a TA intruder. The annunciation TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC sounds when the intruder changes from a proximate
to a TA symbol.
t. Watch the intruder symbol as it tracks into the aircraft symbol and make sure that it changes to an RA intruder. The annunciation
CLIMB, CLIMB, CLIMB (or CLIMB, CLIMB for systems with Change 7.0) sounds, and a climb resolution advisory shows.
u. End the scenario at this point.
v. Set the TCAS ramp test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.
5-19

Range: 5.00 nmi
Altitude: 1 250 ft
w. Start the scenario and watch the VSIs. Make sure that the intruder symbol changes from an other, to a proximate, then to a TA
intruder. The annunciation TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC sounds when the intruder changes from a proximate to a TA.
x. Watch the intruder symbol as it tracks into the aircraft symbol and make sure that it changes to an RA intruder. Make sure
that the annunciation DESCEND, DESCEND, DESCEND (or DESCEND, DESCEND for systems with Change 7.0) does not
sound, and a descend resolution advisory does not show. A climb or a maintain advisory shows.
NOTE
It is important to make sure that the radio altitude level set during step p did not exceed 1200 feet prior to or while
running this test scenario. The descend RA inhibit threshold uses hysteresis. If the altitude did exceed 1 200 feet
prior to being set at 1150 feet, then it is possible that a descend resolution advisory would be issued during this
scenario.
y. Terminate the scenario at this point.

z. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft pressure altitude to 1300 feet as read on the altimeter indicator (set to
29.92).
aa. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to 1300 feet.
ab. Set the TCAS ramp test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Altitude: 1 400 ft
ac. Start the scenario and watch the VSIs. Make sure that the intruder symbol changes from an other, to a proximate, and then to a
TA intruder. The annunciation TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC sounds when the intruder changes from a proximate to a TA.
ad. Watch the intruder symbol as it tracks in to the aircraft symbol. Make sure that it changes to an RA intruder. Make sure that
the annunciation DESCEND, DESCEND, DESCEND (or DESCEND, DESCEND for systems with Change 7.0) sounds, and
that a descend resolution advisory shows.
ae. Continue the scenario until the annunciation CLEAR OF CONFLICT sounds. Make sure that the annunciation INCREASE
DESCENT, INCREASE DESCENT does not sound, and that the increase descent resolution advisory does not show.
af. Terminate the scenario at this point.
ag. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft pressure altitude to 1390 feet as read on the altimeter indicator (set to
29.92).
ah. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to 1700 feet.
ai. Set the TCAS ramp test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.
5-20

Range: 15.00 nmi
Altitude: 1 600 ft
aj. Start the scenario. After the test has begun, select RATE (ALT) and, when intruder reaches 5.0 nmi, set to -500 fpm. Watch the
VSIs, and make sure that the intruder symbol changes from an other, to a proximate, and then to a TA intruder. The annunciation
TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC sounds when the intruder changes from a proximate to a TA.
ak. Watch the intruder symbol as it tracks in to the aircraft symbol. Make sure that it changes to an RA intruder. The annunciation
DESCEND, DESCEND, DESCEND (or DESCEND, DESCEND for systems with Change 7.0) sounds and a descend resolution
advisory shows.
al. Continue to watch the intruder as it tracks in to the aircraft symbol. Make sure that the annunciation INCREASE DESCENT,
INCREASE DESCENT sounds, and an increase descent resolution advisory shows.
am. Terminate the scenario at this point.
an. If the aircraft under test has two radio altimeter systems installed, reset the No. 2 system by closing the No 2 system circuit
breaker, and disable the No 1 system by opening the No 1 system circuit breaker. Repeat test steps ac. through af.
5.2.16. TCAS Mode, Range, and ABOVE-N-BELOW Operation.
1. EXERCISE CARE IN OPERATING THE TRANSPONDER SYSTEM AT PRESSURE ALTI-

TUDES OTHER THAN THE LOCAL AIRPORT PRESSURE ALTITUDE. OPERATION AT OTHER
ACCIDENTS.
2. PRESSURE ALTITUDE. OPERATION AT OTHER PRESSURE ALTITUDES COULD CAUSE FALSE
RESOLUTION OR TRAFFIC ADVISORIES IN TCAS-EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT OPERATING IN THE
VICINITY OF THE AIRCRAFT UNDER TEST. OPERATING THE TRANSPONDER AT PRESSURE
ALTITUDES OTHER THAN THE LOCAL AIRPORT PRESSURE ALTITUDE HAS THE POTENTIAL
TO CAUSE SERIOUS AIRCRAFT ACCIDENTS.
These steps test the interface between the radio altimeter system and the TCAS system, including the TCAS radio altitude inhibits.
b. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft pressure altitude to 10 000 feet as read on the altimeter indicator (set to
29.92).
c. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to above 2500 feet.
d. Locate the TCAS test set antenna at 0º relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with
the following parameters.

Range: 10.00 nmi
Range rate: 0 knots
5-21
Altitude: 10 000 ft
e. Start the scenario.

f. Select the XPDR or STBY mode of operation on the control panel. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show the TCAS OFF
message.
g. Select the TA or TA ONLY mode of operation on the control panel. Make sure that the TCAS indicators show the ONLY TA
message.
h. Select the TA/RA mode of operation on the control panel. Make sure that the TCAS indicator ONLY TA message does not
show.
NOTE
The TA/RA mode message does not show.
i. Select the 12 NM range on the indicators. Make sure that the range shows in the upper-right corner of the indicator, and that
the simulated intruder shows at approximately 10 nautical miles with an altitude data tag of 00.
j. Select the 6 NM range on the indicator and make sure that the range shows in the upper-right corner of the indicator and that
the simulated intruder disappears.
k. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Range rate: 0 knots
Altitude: 14 000 ft
l. Start the scenario.

m. Make sure that the simulated intruder does not show on the indicator.
n. Set the ABOVE-N-BELOW switch to the ABOVE position. Make sure that the message ABV shows in the upper right corner
of the indicator and that the simulated intruder shows at approximately 5 nautical miles with an altitude data tag of +40.
o. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Range rate: 0 knots
Altitude: 6 000 ft
p. Start the scenario.

q. Make sure that the simulated intruder does not show on the indicator.
r. Set the ABOVE-N-BELOW switch to the BELOW position. Make sure that the message BLW shows in the upper right corner
of the indicator, and that the simulated intruder shows at approximately 5 nautical miles with an altitude data tag of +40.
s. Set the ABOVE-N-BELOW switch to the N (normal) position.
5-22
5.2.17. Full-Time/Pop-Up Operation.

ACCIDENTS.
NOTE
Aircraft operating in the area of the aircraft under test may result in TA and/or RA intruders showing on the traffic
display. A TA or RA intruder display will prevent the pop-up mode of operation from being selected.
These steps test the TCAS display operation in full-time or pop-up display modes.
b. Select the TA/RA mode of operation on the control panel.
c. To activate the pop-up mode of operation on the indicator, push the M (mode) button in the lower left corner of the display. The
traffic display will be replaced with the message VERT SPEED X1000 FPM.
d. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft pressure altitude to 10 000 feet as read on the altimeter indicator (set to
29.92).
e. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to above 2500 feet.
f. Locate the TCAS test set antenna at 0 relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the
following parameters.

Range: 10.00 nmi
Altitude: 10 000 ft
g. Start the scenario.

h. Make sure that the indicator traffic display pops up (shows suddenly), that the simulated intruder shows as a TA, and that the
annunciation TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC sounds.
i. Continue the scenario through the annunciation CLEAR OF CONFLICT sounds. Approximately 5 seconds after this message
occurs, the traffic display will be replaced with the message VERT SPEED X1000 FPM.
5-23
5.2.18. Aircraft Altitude Limit Operation.

ACCIDENTS.
These steps test the operation of the TCAS systems altitude limit programming. Determine the aircraft altitude limit programming.
(Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step.3.(c).)
b. Using the Pitot-static test set, set the aircraft barometric pressure altitude to the programmed limit plus 500 feet as read on the
altimeter indicator (set to 29.92). Do not exceed the aircraft service ceiling. If the altitude limit is greater than the aircraft
service ceiling, set the aircraft pressure altitude to the service ceiling.
c. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to above 2500 feet.
d. Locate the TCAS test set antenna at 0° relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft
with the following parameters.

Range: 10.00 nmi
Altitude: 100 ft below aircraft pressure altitude
e. Start the scenario. Use one of the steps below to terminated the scenario, as applicable.
(1) For aircraft that are altitude limited, make sure that the TCAS system does not command a climb advisory. (The advisory
may be either a descend or a maintain.) Terminate the scenario at this point.
(2) For aircraft that are not altitude limited, make sure that the TCAS system issues a climb advisory. Terminate the scenario
at this point.
5.2.19. Aircraft Increased-Climb Inhibit Operation.

ACCIDENTS.
NOTE
This test is applicable only to aircraft that are configured for increased-climb inhibit.
5-24
These steps test the operation of the TCAS systems altitude limit programming. Determine the aircraft increased-climb inhibit
configuration. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step.3.(c).)
b. Configure the aircraft to simulate one of the conditions necessary for an increased climb inhibit. Make sure that all aircraft
systems related to the inhibits are operational and all related circuit breakers are closed.
c. Using the Pitot-static test set, set the aircraft barometric pressure altitude to 3000 feet or as appropriate for the inhibit condition
as read on the altimeter indicator (set to 29.92).
d. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to above 2500 feet.
e. Locate the TCAS test set antenna at 0” relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft

Range: 10.00 nmi
Altitude: 2900 ft or 100 ft below aircraft pressure altitude
f. Start the scenario.

g. Make sure that the annunciation CLIMB, CLIMB, CLIMB (or CLIMB, CLIMB for systems with Change 7.0) sounds, and the
indicator shows a climb advisory.
h. To continue the scenario, make sure that the annunciation INCREASE CLIMB, INCREASE CLIMB does not sound, and that
an indicator increased climb advisory does not show. Other advisories may occur.
i. Terminate the scenario at this point.
j. Repeat steps b. through h. of this scenario for all increased-climb inhibit configurations.
5.2.20. Aircraft Climb Inhibit Operation.

ACCIDENTS.
NOTE
This test is applicable only to aircraft that are configured for increased-climb inhibit.
These steps test the operation of the TCAS systems altitude limit programming. Determine the aircraft climb inhibit configuration.
(Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step.3.(e).)
b. Configure the aircraft to simulate one of the conditions necessary for a climb inhibit. Make sure that all aircraft systems related
to the inhibit are operational and all related circuit breakers are closed.
5-25
c. Using the Pitot-static test set, set the aircraft barometric pressure altitude to 3000 feet or as appropriate for the inhibit condition
as read on the altimeter indicator (set to 29.92).
d. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to above 2500 feet.
e. Locate the TCAS test set antenna at 0° relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft

Range: 10.00 nmi

g. Make sure that the annunciation CLIMB, CLIMB, CLIMB (or CLIMB, CLIMB for systems with Change 7.0) does not sound,
and that the indicators do not show a climb advisory. Other advisories may occur.
h. Terminate the scenario at this point.
i. Repeat steps b, through h. of this scenario for all climb-inhibit configurations.
5.2.21. Aural Warning Priorities: TCAS OFF.
NOTE
This procedure is applicable only to systems having TCAS transmitter-receiver connector pin RBP-5A connected
to other systems. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step 3.(g).)
This test verifies the operation of the TCAS aural warning inhibit operation. Advisory inhibits are applied from systems having
higher priority than TCAS. These are typically the wind shear and ground proximity warning systems. Other systems may also
provide inhibits to TCAS.
b. Generate an advisory inhibit warning condition and make sure that the TCAS system automatically switches to the TCAS OFF
mode.
c. Remove the warning condition and make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
d. Repeat steps b. and c. of this test for all other advisory inhibit warning conditions.
5.2.22. Aural Warning Priorities: TA ONLY/Audio Inhibit.
NOTE
This procedure is applicable only to systems having TCAS transmitter-receiver connector pin RBP-5B, RBP-5C,
or RBP-5D connected to other systems. (Refer to Paragraph 5.2.2.2, Step 3.(g).)
This test verifies the operation of the TCAS aural-warning inhibit operation. Advisory inhibits are applied from systems having
higher priority than TCAS. These are typically the windshear and ground proximity warning systems. Other systems may also
provide inhibits.
b. Using the Pitot-static system test set, set the aircraft barometric pressure altitude to 2000 feet as read on the altimeter indicator
(set to 29.92).
c. Using the radio altimeter test set, set the radio altitude to 2000 feet.
5-26
d. Locate the test set antenna at 0 relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the
following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
e. Start the scenario.

f. Generate an advisory inhibit warning condition and maintain the condition until after the simulated intruder switches from a
proximate intruder to a TA intruder.
g. Make sure that the TCAS system switches to the ONLY TA mode, and that the annunciation TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC does not
sound.
h. Remove the advisory inhibit warning condition, and make sure that the TCAS system returns to normal operation.
i. Terminate the scenario at this point.
j. Repeat steps b. through h, of this test for all other advisory inhibit warning conditions.
5.2.23. Bearing Accuracy: Top Directional Antenna.
These steps test the bearing accuracy of the top TCAS antenna.
NOTE
This test should be done in an area clear of adjacent interfering structures, other aircraft, or ground equipment
which may cause reflections affecting bearing accuracy. This test cannot be accomplished inside a hangar facility
due to uncontrollable RF reflections.

b. Accurately position the TCAS test set antenna within the horizontal plane of the aircraft TCAS antenna and on the radial cor-
responding to the 0° relative bearing to the aircraft.
c. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Range rate: 0 knots
Altitude: airport elevation, plus 500 feet.
d. Start the scenario.

e. To measure relative bearing, adjust the TCAS test set range to position the simulated intruder symbol on the traffic display at
an optimum distance from the VSI/RA/TA aircraft symbol.
f. Determine the relative bearing of the simulated intruder symbol.
g. Bearing accuracy is determined using the following formula: Bearing accuracy = (TCAS bearing - actual bearing). Bearing
accuracy must be within ± l5 ° of the actual bearing except for the 180° position. Larger bearing error is allowed at 180°.
5-27
h. Repeat steps b. through f. at the 90°, 180°, and 270° radials from the aircraft.
5.2.24. Bearing Accuracy: Bottom Directional Antenna.

ACCIDENTS.
This test verifies the bearing accuracy of the bottom TCAS antenna. The test should be accomplished in an area clear of adjacent
interfering structures, other aircraft, or ground equipment that may cause reflections affecting bearing accuracy. The test cannot be
accomplished inside a hangar facility due to uncontrollable RF reflections. Bearing accuracy testing at certain aircraft bearings may
not be possible due to aircraft landing gear, wing or engine nacelles projecting into the RF field between the TCAS antenna and the
test set.
NOTE
It is recommended that the top directional antenna be covered with an antenna attenuator cap (refer to Figure 5-1),
or attenuation material, to prevent interrogating the TCAS ramp test set and interfering with the bottom directional
antenna testing. If the cap is used, RF-seal it to the fuselage by taping the sides of the cap to the fuselage with
adhesive copper-foil tape. For TTR-2100, allow the unit to run in the operational state for at least 1 minute before
covering antenna; not doing so will result in cable calibration faults.
NOTE
When using an attenuator cap, it is recommended that the TCAS system be placed in the STBY mode while the
cap is being installed or removed. During installation and removal, the cap may interfere with the TCAS receiver
calibration function and cause a nuisance system fail. After the cap is installed or removed, place the TCAS system
into an operational state (TA ONLY or TNRA) and let the system operate for approximately five minutes prior to
collecting bearing accuracy data.

(set to 29.92).
d. Accurately position the TCAS test set antenna within the horizontal plane of the aircraft TCAS antenna and on the radial cor-
responding to the 0° relative bearing to the aircraft.
e. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Range rate: 0 knots
Altitude: 2 000 feet.
5-28

g. To measure relative bearing, adjust the TCAS test set range to position the simulated intruder symbol on the traffic display at
an optimum distance from the VSI/RA/TA aircraft symbol.
h. Determine the relative bearing of the simulated intruder symbol.
i. Bearing accuracy is determined using the following formula: Bearing accuracy = (TCAS bearing - actual bearing). Bearing
accuracy must be within ±l5° of the actual bearing except for the 180° position. Larger bearing error is allowed at 180°.
j. Repeat Steps c. through h. at the 90°, 180°, and 270° radials from the aircraft.
5.2.25. Change 7.1 Update: Aural Check of "Level Off, Level Off".

ACCIDENTS.
The following scenario is artifical, but it provides an easy and reliable way of make a "Level Off, Level Off" aural message.
b. Use the pitot-static system test set. Set the aircraft barometric pressure altitude to 8,000 feet according to the altimeter indicator
(set to 29.92).
c. Use the radio altimeter test set. Set the radio altitude to greater than 2500 feet, Alternately, set the radio altitude to reflect NCD
on the 429 input.
NOTE
Covering the radio altimeter antenna with EchoZorb will set the radio altitude to reflect NCD on the 429 input.
d. Apply power to the TCAS that is under test.
NOTE
Make sure the Altitude setting on the IFR in the following simulation is in absolute altitude mode, not relative
altitude. This parameter is found on the IPR-6000 TCAS setup page.
e. Locate the test set antenna at 0 deg relative bearing from the aircraft. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with
the following parameters:
Intruder Type Mode S
Range 0.1 nmi
Range Rate 0 knots
Altitude (absolute) 10,000 ft
Altitude Rate 0 fpm
g. Using the pitot-static system test set, at a rate of 500 to800 fpm, change own_ship altitude to climb.
h. Verify the annunciation "Level Off, Level Off" sounds. Other advisories may occur.
i. Terminate the scenario.
5-29
5.2.26. Bottom Omnidirectional Antenna Operation.

ACCIDENTS.
These steps test operation of the bottom omnidirectional antenna. This test should be accomplished in an area clear of adjacent
interfering structures, other aircraft, or ground equipment that may cause reflections affecting bearing accuracy. This test cannot be
accomplished inside a hangar facility due to uncontrollable RF reflections.
NOTE
It is recommended that the top directional antenna be covered with an antenna attenuator cap (Refer to Figure 5-1),
or attenuation material, to prevent interrogating the TCAS ramp test set and interfering with the bottom directional
antenna testing. If the cap is used, RF-seal it to the fuselage by taping the sides of the cap to the fuselage with
adhesive copper-foil tape. For TTR-2100, allow the unit to run in the operational state for at least 1 minute before
covering antenna; not doing so will result in cable calibration faults.

(set to 29.92).
d. Accurately position the TCAS test set antenna within the horizontal plane of the aircraft bottom omnidirectional antenna and
on the radial corresponding to the 0° relative bearing to the aircraft.
e. Set the TCAS test set to simulate an intruder aircraft with the following parameters.

Range: 5.00 nmi
Range rate: 250 knots
Altitude: 1 900 feet.

g. Make sure that the indicator shows a yellow TA no bearing message (TA 5.0 -01) below the aircraft symbol.
h. Terminate the scenario at this point.
i. Repeat steps c. through h. at the 90°, 180°, and 270° radials from the aircraft.
5.3. TROUBLESHOOTING.
The TCAS II system uses Built-In Test Equipment (BITE) in the TTR-920/-921 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver and TPR-720/-900/-901
ATC/Mode S Transponder to test the operational integrity of the system. Monitoring of system functions occurs at power-up, is
continuous during operation, and may be initiated manually through TEST switches on the TTR-920/-921 and TPR-720/-900/-901
front panels or on the cockpit control for the transponder/TCAS. When a failure is detected in a system unit, identification of the
5-30 Change 1
failed unit is held in the transponder or transmitter-receiver memory. When self-test is activated, front panel indicators will show
which system unit or function has failed. (For a critical failure, a TCAS FAIL flag will be displayed on the active cockpit TCAS
indicator(s).) Refer to TTR-920/-921 TCAS II Transmitter-Receiver Controls and Indicators, Table 3-1, and the TPR-720 ATC/Mode
S Transponder Controls and Indicators, Table 3-5, for a description and function of each front-panel indicator.
5.3.1. Dual Systems.
In troubleshooting the TCAS, it is important to remember that failure of a system non-TCAS LRU can cause a related TCAS unit
to indicate a fault condition. The technician may mistakenly remove a functioning unit when further investigation would have led
to the faulty LRU. In aircraft having dual installations of systems such as transponders, air data systems, and TCAS displays, both
LRUs of a system must fail for the TCAS to indicate a failure of that function. If one LRU remains operating, that system is not
shown as failed. Individual tests of the suspected system will have to be performed to reveal which of the two LRUs is faulty.
5.3.2. Troubleshooting Aids.
Troubleshooting aids in determining a faulty LRU are given in flow-chart format. The procedures are aids in identifying possible
faulty system-related LRUs through the use of the transponder and TCAS transmitter-receiver self-test functions. The procedures use
the LRU self-test switches, front panel indicators, and TCAS displays that have extended test capability. A method of determining
the strapping configuration for the TCAS installation in individual aircraft is given in Table 5-3. Knowing the strapping configuration
of the aircraft can be useful in analyzing and troubleshooting reported TCAS problems.
5.3.2.1. Test Setup. Before any operational self-testing or troubleshooting can be done, the TCAS and all associated systems
must be operating. Check to be sure that:
• Primary power is applied
• All related circuit breakers are engaged
• The systems are turned on through their associated controls.
5.3.2.2. Procedures. For system fault isolation procedures, refer to Figure 5-2 and do the procedures as directed, until a faulty
LRU is identified and replaced, or a determination is made that the fault is not detectable when the aircraft is on the ground. (Because
of the operating characteristics of TCAS, certain functions may only be available when the aircraft is not on the ground or in a landing
configuration.) For transponder fault isolation procedures refer to Figure 5-3 and perform the procedures as directed until a faulty
LRU is identified and replaced, or a determination is made that the fault is not detectable when the aircraft is on the ground.
Change 1 5-31
Figure 5-2. TCAS System Fault Isolation Procedures (Sheet 1 of 8)
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39/(5-40 Blank)
Figure 5-3. Transponder Fault Isolation Procedures (Sheet 1 of 4)
5-41/(5-42 Blank)
5-43/(5-44 Blank)
5-45/(5-46 Blank)
5-47/(5-48 Blank)
5.3.3. Aircraft Wiring Strapping for TCAS.

The following paragraphs describe aircraft wiring strapping for TCAS for TTR-921/-4000. This section does not apply to the TTR-
2100.
5.3.3.1. General. Procedures are given in Paragraph 5.3.4. and Table 5-3 for determining how the aircraft wiring for the TCAS
is strapped. The procedures are written for use with a JcAIR ARINC 429 word reader, JcAIR model 429E or 429EX. If a different
model or manufacturer’s word reader is used, refer to that manufacturer’s information for operating instructions.
5.3.3.1.1. A cable for connecting between the TTR-920 data port (small connector in the upper left of the TTR-920 front panel)
and the word reader must be locally fabricated. For the TTR-921/-4000 the data port is a 19-pin circular connector located in the
lower center of the front panel. A schematic and parts information for this cable is given in Figure 5-5.
5.3.3.2. Word Reader Data Interpretation. Data on the JcAlR 429E or 429EX word reader is shown in four groups in a display
window. Figure 5-4 shows an example of a readout. The first group, three digits, is the label of the ARINC 429 word being displayed.
Label 357 is the one to be used in the following procedures. The second group, two digits, is not important to these procedures and
may be ignored. The third group, six digits, is the group of interest. The fourth group, right-most two digits, is not important to
these procedures and may also be ignored.
5.3.3.2.1. The third group indicates data parity (a validity-checking signal) by the left-most digit. This digit in this group may be
ignored for these procedures. The remaining five digits in the group indicate the word number and the data showing the strapping
configuration.
5.3.3.2.2. The data displayed is in Hexadecimal (HEX) format and must be converted to binary format (refer to Table 5-2) for use
with the information in Figure 5-4. Each of the single hex digits converts into four binary digits, thus the right-most five digits in the
third display group convert to twenty binary digits. It is these digits from which strapping is determined in Table 5-3. Hexadecimal
digits may be converted to binary digits by referring to the following list.
Figure 5-4. Example Word Reader Display
Table 5-2. Hexadecimal to Binary Conversion.
HEX DIGIT EQUAL HEX DIGIT EQUAL HEX DIGIT EQUAL HEX DIGIT EQUAL
BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY
0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1100
1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 1101
2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 1110
3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F 1111
5.3.3.2.3. Conversion of the 11 801 E group in the word reader display is as follows:
5-49
The left-most 1 is ignored. The next 1 is converted to 0001. The 8 is converted to 1000. The 0 is converted to 0000. The
right-most 1 is converted to 0001. The E is converted to 1110.
The converted data is then written as: 0001 1000 0000 0001 1110.
5.3.3.2.4. The position, or bit number, of each digit is numbered from right to left, starting with 9 and going to 28. (The right-most
digit, 0, is bit 9; the second-from-right digit, 1 is bit 10, the third-from-right 1 is bit 11, and so on. The left-most 0 is bit 28.)
5.3.3.2.5. The left-most group, bits 25 through 28, is the binary value of the word number. In the example, the word number is 1.
The rest of the data identifies the bits, by position number, within that word.
5.3.4. JcAlR 429E/429EX Operating Procedures.
The following procedures are written for the TTR-921/-4000 using JcAIR 429E or 429EX word reader. If another word reader is
used, refer to that manufacturer’s instructions. This section does not apply to the TTR-2100.
a. Turn on all units associated with the TCAS system (TCAS transmitter-receiver, mode S transponder, air data system, radio
altimeter, associated display(s), and any other equipment that must be operating for the TCAS to function). Allow any necessary
warm-up time for any system unit(s) to elapse.
b. On the TTR-920 TCAS Transmitter-Receiver front panel, loosen the two screws in the upper left corner securing the connector
cover to the panel. Swing the cover away and insert the multi-pin connector of the interconnect cable into the data connector.
For the TTR-921, there is a captive connector cover that needs to be removed. (There are no screws to loosen.)
NOTE
The cable must be locally fabricated. Refer to Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5. Word Reader Interconnect Cable Fabrication Diagram
c. Turn on the word reader. If the word reader is model 429EX, press TXIRX.
5-50
d. Push TRAP.
e. On the keyboard, type the numbers 357.
f. Push ENT:
• For model 429E, push ENT two times.
• For 429EX, push ENT four times.
g. Push TX/RX.
h. Push ↑.
i. Push EDITIDEL.
j. On the keyboard, type the numbers 271.
k. Push ENT.
l. Push LAB/DAT.
m. Push EDITIDEL.
n. On the keyboard, type the numbers 000400.
o. Push ENT.
p. Set top row (black) switches as follows:
TX PARITY TX SPEED RX DISPLAY

SPEED
ODD LO LO HEX
q. Insert MAINT OUT plug into word reader RX jack first. Then insert MAINT IN plug into word reader TX jack.
r. Press TX/RX.
s. Observe word labels until word 6 begins then press LAB/DAT. (If word label display is not terminated, it continues until word
reader buffer is filled.)
t. Push ↑. Display shows 357 IS0 ALPHA #5, momentarily changes to TRAPPED WORD x (where x is between 1 and 5, or
higher if word label continues beyond 5 in step s), then changes back to 357 IS0 ALPHA #5. The value of x identifies word
number and associated data being displayed.
u. Press LAB/DAT. This switches the display from label information to data.
v. Record 6-digit group of digits displayed. (This is the 11801E group used in the example. Refer to Figure 5-4.)
w. Press LAB/DAT. This switches display back to show label information.
x. Repeat Step 5.3.4.t through Step 5.3.4.w until all data through word 5 has been displayed.
5.3.4.1. When all data has been read, disable the transmitter-receiver 357 word transmissions by performing the following steps.
PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES BEFORE LEAVING THE TCAS EQUIPMENT. FAILURE TO
DISABLE DATA TRANSMISSIONS MAY AFFECT OPERATION OF THE TCAS.
a. Turn off word reader, then turn it back on.

b. If word reader is model 429E, press TXIRX. If not, then go to step c.
c. Push ↑.
d. Push EDIT/DEL.
5-51
e. On the keyboard, type the numbers 271.

f. Push ENT.
g. Push LAB/DAT.
h. Push EDIT/DEL.
i. On the keyboard, type the numbers 000000.
j. Push ENT.
k. Remove interconnect cable from TTR-920/-921/-2100.
(1) Swing the cover plate into the closed position.
(2) Secure the cover plate.
5.3.5. Strapping Configuration.
For each group of data recorded in Paragraph 5.3.4, step v, convert it to binary format to identify the word and bit numbers. Refer to
the word and bit numbers in Table 5-3 and determine the state of the strapped functions. This section does not apply to the TTR-2100.
Table 5-3. Label 357-to-Strapping Configuration Reference.
WORD BIT NO LOGIC STATE OF BIT FUNCTION CONNECTOR PIN NO

1 9 (word 2, bit 22+word 2, bit 23) Climb inhibited (logic state is —
or (word 2, bit 24+word 3, bit 9) AND/OR function of indicated
words and bits)
1 10 1=OPEN, 0=GND Cancel advisory RMP-3D
1 11 1=OPEN, 0=GND On-ground RMP-5K
1 12 1=OPEN, 0=GND Performance Limited RMP-6D
1 13 1=OPEN, 0=GND Landing gear down RMP-13F
1 14 1=OPEN, 0=GND Traffic advisory #I functional RMP-7E
1 15 1=OPEN, 0=GND Traffic advisory #2 functional RMP-7J
1 16 1=OPEN, 0=GND Resolution advisory #I RMP-14C
functional
1 17 1=OPEN, 0=GND Resolution advisory #2 RMP-13E
functional
1 18 1=VALID, 0 =FAIL Magnetic heading valid RMP-6C
1 19 1=VALID, 0 =FAIL Attitude valid RMP-4K
1 20 1=VALID, 0 =FAIL Radio altitude #I functional RMP-2K
1 21 1=VALID, 0 =FAIL Radio altitude #2 functional RMP-3C
1 22 (word 3, bit l0+word 3, bit 11) or Increase-climb inhibited (logic —
(word 3, bit 12+word 3, bit 13) state is AND/OR function of
indicated words and bits)
1 23 1=GND, 0=OPEN High-priority advisory RBP-5A
inhibited
1 24 1=OPEN, 0=GND Test mode inhibit RBP-8E
2 9 thru 14 Not used
5-52
Table 5-3. Label 357-to-Strapping Configuration Reference. - Continued
WORD BIT NO LOGIC STATE OF BIT FUNCTION CONNECTOR PIN NO

2 15 1=OPEN, 0=GND Send software number RBP-6D
2 16, 17 Not used
2 18 1=GND, 0=OPEN Simulator mode request RBP-6B
2 19 1=GND, 0=OPEN Data load request RBP-6A
2 20 1=GND, 0=OPEN Low-priority advisory inhibit RBP-5B, or 5C, or 5D
2 21 1=OPEN, 0=GND Report WTA display fails RBP-4G
2 22 1=OPEN, 0=GND Climb inhibit raw B0 RMP-1J
2 23 1=OPEN, 0=GND Climb inhibit raw B1 RMP-13G
2 24 1=OPEN, 0=GND Climb inhibit raw B2 RBP-5J
3 9 1=OPEN, 0=GND Climb inhibit raw B3 RBP-5K
3 10 1=OPEN, 0=GND Increase climb inhibit raw B4 RBP-5E
3 11 1=OPEN, 0=GND Increase climb inhibit raw B5 RBP-5F
3 12 1=OPEN, 0=GND Increase climb inhibit raw B8 RBP-5G
3 13 1=OPEN, 0=GND Increase climb inhibit raw B9 RBP-5H
4 9 1=OPEN, 0=GND Altitude limit 2 000 RMP-6E
4 10 1=OPEN, 0=GND Altitude limit 4 000 RMP-6F
4 11 1=OPEN, 0=GND Altitude limit 8 000 RMP-6G
4 12 1=OPEN, 0=GND Altitude limit 16 000 RMP-6H
4 13 1=OPEN, 0=GND Altitude limit 32 000 RMP-6J
4 14 1=OPEN, 0=GND Audio tone enable (false) RMP-6K
4 15 1=OPEN, 0=GND Traffic only on-ground RMP-7E
4 16 1=OPEN, 0=GND Display all traffic RMP-7F
5 9 1=OPEN, 0=GND TA RA symbols max 1 RBP-8K
5 10 1=OPEN, 0=GND TA RA symbols max 2 RBP-8J
5 11 1=OPEN, 0=GND TA RA symbols max 4 RBP-8H
5 12 1=OPEN, 0=GND TA RA symbols max 8 RBP-8G
5 13 1=OPEN, 0=GND TA RA symbols max 16 RBP-8F
5.4. TCAS INSTALLATION SYSTEMS TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE.

5.4.1. Problem Troubleshooting.
For possible causes and corrective actions to commonly observed situations in installations, refer to Table 5-4.
5-53
Table 5-4. Problem Troubleshooting Guide.
SITUATION AND FAIL PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

INDICAT1ON
In-flight TPR, TTR Aircraft sees itself Open/shorts in the suppression Physically check for
cable, especially coax pulled out of open/short in wiring.
connector.
Check J12/J13 at aircraft
connector. Look for
loose/pulled out coax or
bad crimp.
Degraded P4 pulse from TTR Check P4 with oscilloscope
AMP keying pin plate on aircraft R/R TPR keying lock plate.
TPR mating connector offset HI by
as much as 0.04 in.
In-flight TPR, TTR Targets that appear as (1) TTR, RBP-7F tied to ground (1) Check strapping of TTR
TA or RA w/o appearing for pop-up TA/RA mode. RBP-7F.
as proximity/other traffic
first.
(2) intruder aircraft with weak (2) Check out aircraft with
Mode S transmit signal. other Mode S targets.
(3) TTR I/O or processor problem.
TTR No RAs displayed. Check termination of advisory
discretes RBP-5A thru 5D.
Check termination of ground
display mode RBP-7E.
Check termination of display all
traffic, RBP-7F.
(Applicable only to analog radio
altimeters) Check for reversal of
wiring between RAD ALT 1/2
and TTR and reversal at TTR
terminations.
Unable to do TCAS No fault light on TTC/TTR/TPR Physically check all
system self-test on fault lamps, cycle OK when TTC connections to aid ground
ground w/RAD ALT at initiates self-test. All indications switch and circuit breaker
0. No TCAS self-test that IN AlR/ON GROUND switch itself in addition to voltage
display or aural, TA or circuit fault. check of TTR RMP-5K.
ONLY flag on IVSI plus
proximity traffic.
TTR/SYS Swimming or rotating Check MAG HDG and make sure Have all MAG HDG inputs to
targets. that ±26 V ac ref inputs are taken TTR coming from either #I or
from the same MAG HDG source #2 MAG HDG source.
as the VALID and X, Y, Z.
5-54
Table 5-4. Problem Troubleshooting Guide. - Continued

INDICAT1ON
TCAS audio level is too Incorrect audio level program Check RBP-7A/7B/7C
high or low. strapping. strapping with installation
manual. For audio level
program strapping change,
use breakout box. A change
in strapping will require TTR
power to be cycled. TTR
reads audio program strapping
once, on power-up.
For TTR-2100, ensure the
negative terminal for the 8
ohm and 600 ohm output
(RMP-2G, RMP-3G) is not
connected to ground.
SYSTEM Noisy speakers. Check common ground. May have Isolate or rerun speaker
to isolate or rerun speaker wiring. wiring.
TVI VSI pointer deflected to Ground TVI pin 35; check dc Repair or replace TVI.
negative 4000 to 3000 BARO rate reference. It should
feet/min sometimes display 2.5 V dc with 5% variance.
clears briefly.
If erratic, TVI problem is in A3
analog card.
V/S flag annunciated Check ±12 V dc ref inputs, pins 1, Repair or replace TVI.
with pointer at 0 ft/min. 3 at aircraft without TVI connected.
If OK, check at TVI.
Check for 0 V dc at pin 2, DC Repair or replace TVI.
BAR0 rate (A3 amp converts to 2.5
V dc).
Check for 15 to 28 V dc input on Repair or replace TVI.
pin 8, valid discrete.
AOA check TTR Bottom and top Top and bottom directional antenna
directional antenna not isolated or shielded from each
bearing accuracy is out other.
of specification.
5-55

INDICAT1ON
Set the aidground circuit
NOTE
breaker to ground and RAD
If using IFR 201 stationary ALT 0 for top directional
test targets, ensure scenario antenna bearing check.
alt is within ±2700 altitude (If RAD ALT below
window for “other” traffic, 400 ft, bottom antenna
±1200 ft for proximity tar- doesn’t transmit Mode C
gets. interrogations) Will get TAs
w/TA ONLY flag, no aural,
proximity traffic, but no RAs.
For RAs, set RADALT to
above 400 ft and in air.
Remain under aircraft, 6 to
8 ft from antenna for bottom
antenna AOA check and have
RAD ALT set above 1100 ft
(Change 6.04A and change
7.0) for RAs and in air.
Water or excess RTV in antenna Clean out. Install foam plugs
bolt holes. and RTV.
Antenna cable phase misalignment Check to see if top antenna
cables switched with bottom
directional antenna cables
(different physical length).
If cables appear same length,
swap the cable from the port
near largest errors with other
three cables, one at a time.
If problem persists, replace
complete cable set.
Front landing gear creating Wrap with echosorb.
multipath.
Ground check Transpon- Dual Mode S, TPR 2 Single ADC not tied in parallel to Check installation instructions
der (TPR) fail indicate lVSl and both transponders, MP-6E (i.e., and wiring for dual TPR and
self-test with TTC in Port number 2 for transponder 2). TTC w/altitude select.
ALT SEL 2. When in
ALT SEL 1, TCAS OK
and no TTC FAIL lights.
5-56

INDICAT1ON
TPR/SYS TPR fail but checks OK Could be antenna and/or associated Check squitter frequency
in other aircraft. cable/connectors. on ATC-601. If frequency
is greater than 1.8 sec, this
indicates that the top or
bottom antenna/antenna
connector is bad. Isolate the
antenna and check for reply
using ATC-601 power test.
TTC indicate TPR FAIL If ADC and TPR check OK, Repair or replace IVSI
if ALT SEL 1 switch to swap IVSIs and look for hard
ALT SEL 2. fail. (ARINC 575 data may be
unaffected by fail).
Dual Mode S, one Check antenna relay and
antenna (top and ensure that it is tied to TPRI,
bottom), TPR 1 Failed and not TPR 2.
self-test with TTC FAIL
lit if TPR 1 SEL.
Dual Mode S, TPR Check TPR TP-GD, if ground, If TTC indicated as failed,
self-test LED indicates TPR/Ant only fail will be make sure by checking J1
CTL (or ANT or ALT) annunciated by TTC FAIL light. and J2 429 bus outputs for
fail but no FAIL light Failure should be what TPR BITE presence of data.
annunciation on TTC annunciated.
panel.
TCAS self-test OK Jvhen Check Mode S address for Program correct Mode S
in STBY. In TA/RA or 0000/1111s. address.
in XPDR, TCAS FAIL
audio and TCAS OFF
message on IVSI. TTR
LE D/extended self-test
OK.
TTR/SYS Procedure for testing Test for testing climb inhibits for
climb inhibits on 747 747 aircraft.
aircraft.
(1) Set aircraft BAR0 and radio
altimeters to 1000 ft.
NOTE
Set test set in front of aircraft
at height of upper antenna.
5-57

INDICAT1ON
(2) Using IFR TCAS-201 (or
equivalent) ramp test set, set
intruder altitude to 900 ft. Set range
to 6 nm and set closure rate to
500 knots with no vertical closure
rate. Set flap control to 30 degrees.
Begin scenario. (This will test the
Climb inhibit.)
TCAS should first issue Traffic,
Traffic annunciation, then issue RA
Monitor vertical speed.
(3) Reset TCAS-201 to 6 nm range
and set closure rate to 500 knots.
Set flap control to 10 degrees flaps.
Begin scenario. (This will test
Increase climb inhibit.)
TCAS should first issue Traffic,
Traffic annunciation ~ then issue
RA Climb, climb. The TCAS will
not issue Increase climb, increase
climb RA.
Own aircraft alt = 1000 ft

Intruder alt = 900 ft
Intruder range = 6 nm
Intruder closure = 500 kts
rate
5-58

INDICAT1ON
TCAS placed in TA ONLY Four parameters will cause TCAS
mode to be placed in TA ONLY mode.
(1) Control head. Label 016 Troubleshoot TTC

contains sensitivity control bits
(bits 15 - 17) with the bits equal to
“010” (i.e., MODE SEL switch to
TA ONLY position).
(2) Radio altimeter. A value of Troubleshoot Rad. Alt. and
less than 1100 ft or an open analog associated interface to TCAS.
input line in combination with a
valid status discrete.
(3) Inhibit discretes. A ground on Troubleshoot discrete
either RBP-5B, 5C, 5D will inhibit interface.
TA/RA mode.
(4) Ground station command. A
Mode S ground station can send
a Mode S command to TCAS to
place it in TA ONLY mode.
No self-test Inability to perform Improper connections or faulty Verify discrete connections.
self-test. weight-on-wheels, or in air/ground
discrete (TTR-92X, TTR-2100,
RMP-5 K).
No TTC/TPR fault lamp and Invalid altitude displayed Faulty servo inputs to transponder Check servo inputs to
invalid altitude displayed on on Mode S ramp tester or (usually open). Altitude fault transponder.
Mode S ramp tester altitude fault with TTC problem causes disparity between
fail lamp and TPR ALT coarse and fine synchro (greater
LED annunciated. than ±1500 feet) that invalid
flag was set, causing fault
annunciations.
TTR No TCAS audio A discrepancy in the TCAS inhibit Check TCAS inhibit discretes.
and no TCAS FAIL discretes (RBPSA/ SS/SC/SD).
annunciations on front
panel LEDs.
Front panel LED and Mode S address is not wired into Check Mode S address wiring
TTC-920 control panel transponder. into transponder.
self test OK, TCAS
FAIL flag on TA/RA
display and extended
self-test indicates TCAS
processor FAIL.
5-59
5.4.2. TCAS Testing Hints.

The list of testing hints that follows is useful when troubleshooting a system installation.
• The TCAS processor and Mode S transponders have an input from the aircraft ground sense relay or squat switch. This discrete
is a dc ground for on-ground, and it is open for in-air.
• Most Mode S transponder installations are wired (TP-5J to common) to inhibit ATCRBS (Mode A and C) replies while the aircraft
is on the ground. The transponder will transmit Mode S information once per second (squitter) whenever it is not in STBY mode.
The squitter information tells TCAS-equipped aircraft a number of things about your aircraft, including whether it is on-ground
or in air.
• To fully test the transponder using a ramp tester the squat switch must be open.
• The TCAS unit uses the squat switch as a validity check for radio altitude input. If it sees more than 50 feet radio altitude while
on-ground, it will annunciate TCAS FAIL (indicating faulty radio altimeter).
• To place the TCAS unit in air, the squat switch logic must be set to in air and more than 50 feet radio altitude must be input.
• The TCAS logic inhibits all audio alerts below 900 feet (for Change 6.04A or 400 feet for Change 7.0) on the approach and until
reaching 1100 (for Change 6.04A or 600 feet for Change 7.0) feet on climb-out. It will annunciate TA ONLY below that altitude.
This is based on radio altitude not pressure altitude.
• The TCAS subtracts its own radio altitude from its own pressure altitude (29.92”) to estimate airport field elevation. Any target
reporting a pressure altitude within 180 feet of field elevation will not show on TCAS. Targets squittering on the ground, regardless
of reported pressure altitude, will not show on TCAS. ATCRBS equipped aircraft without altitude reporting will be displayed.
• To start a realistic ground test of the TCAS, set squat switch logic to in air and cover radio altimeter antennas with metal tape.
The TCAS unit will think it is above 2500 feet and nearby aircraft are also above 2500 feet. The TCAS unit will report several
alerts for avoiding nearby aircraft, but it will be ignored by TCAS equipped aircraft because the reported altitude will be the field
elevation.
THERE IS A CONCERN THAT IF THE AIRCRAFT PITOT/STATIC SYSTEM IS DEPRESSURIZED

TO AN ALTITUDE ABOVE FIELD ELEVATION, THEN A FALSE TA OR RA ALERT CAN BE GEN-
ERATED IN OTHER TCAS-EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT FLYING NEARBY. THIS HAS THE POTENTIAL
TO CAUSE SERIOUS ACCIDENTS, ENDANGERING HUMAN LIFE.
• Anytime the static system is pumped up, the transponder must be in STANDBY or the upper and lower transponder antennas
must be covered with Radio Frequency (RF) absorbent boots.
5.4.3. Label 350 Fault Data Monitoring.

These procedures are written for monitoring label 350 fault data using a JcAIR 429EX data bus reader. Other models of data bus
readers may require different steps. This section does not apply to the TTR-2100.
a. Connect JcAIR 429EX bus reader to TCAS R/T front panel data connector, using a locally fabricated test cable. (Refer to
Figure 5-5.)
b. Insert the MAINT OUT plug of the interconnect cable into the RX jack of the JcAIR 429EX data bus reader. (The MAINT IN
plug is not used.)
c. Turn on the JcAIR 429EX data bus reader.
d. Push the TX/RX key. The message 1 RX LABELS must show in the display.
e. Push the UP ARROW slew key.
f. Push the LAB/DAT key.
5-60
5.4.3.1. The JcAIR 429EX data bus reader constantly monitors the label 350 maintenance word when connected to the TCAS
R/T in this manner. The JcAIR 429EX data bus reader shows four groups of Hexadecimal (HEX) characters. The third group of
characters from the left represents label 350 bits 9 through 32. The left-most group of characters represents bits 30 through 32 which
can be ignored for this procedure. The HEX characters of interest are the five right-most characters of this group which contain
TCAS system faults being reported during the monitoring of label 350. (Refer to Table 5-5.)
5.4.4. Label 350 Fault Data Trap.
Sometimes when performing TCAS troubleshooting, trapping label 350 fault data to look for intermittent problems or checking
TTC-920( ) control switch functions is required. Procedures for label 350 data word trapping, using a JcAIR 429 EX data bus reader
follow. This section does not apply to the TTR-2100.
a. Do Paragraph 5.4.3, Step 5.4.3.a through Step 5.4.3.d of the label 350 monitoring procedures.
b. Push the TRAP key.
c. Enter 350 at the TRAP LABEL ? xxx prompt in the display window.
d. Push the ENT (enter) key four times. Observe the data words fill up to a maximum of 256, or as long as necessary.
e. Push the UP ARROW slew key to show TRAPPED DATA WORD 1.
f. Push the LAB/DAT key to switch the display to 350 data and record the six hexadecimal character data group.
0 C 0 1 0 0
Bits Bits Bits Bits Bits
25-28 21 -24 17-20 13-16 9-12
g. Push the LAB/DAT key a second time to switch display screens to 350 label information.
h. Push the UP ARROW slew key. The next label 350 data word will be briefly shown in the right-most character position of the
display window.
i. Repeat steps f through g to show the remaining trapped label 350 data words up to number 256. Refer to Table 5-5 for label
350-bit coding.
Table 5-5. Label 350 Maintenance Word Bit Coding.
BIT FUNCTlON CODING

1-8 LABEL 350 (11101000)
9 - 10 SDI
11 TCAS COMPUTER UNIT 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
12 UPPER ANTENNA 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
13 LOWER ANTENNA 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
14 RADALT INPUT BUS 1 0=NORMAL, 1=INACTIVE
15 RADALT INPUT BUS 2 0=NORMAL, 1=INACTIVE
16 ATC/MODE S XPDR 1 0=ACTIVE / STANDBY, 0=INACTlVE / FAIL
17 ATC/MODE S XPDR 2 0=ACTIVE / STANDBY, 0=INACTlVE / FAIL
18 ATTITUDE INPUT BUS 0=NORMAL, 1=INACTIVE
19 MAGNETIC HEADING INPUT BUS 0=NORMAL, 1=INACTIVE
20 TCAS SYSTEM STATUS 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
5-61
Table 5-5. Label 350 Maintenance Word Bit Coding. - Continued
BIT FUNCTlON CODING

21 FLIGHT PERF. BUS STATUS 0=NORMAL, 1=INACTIVE
22 SPARE
23 TA 1 DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
24 TA 2 DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
25 RA 1 DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
26 RA 2 DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS 0=NORMAL, 1=FAILURE
27 CFDIU INPUT BUS 0=NORMAL, 1=INACTIVE
28 BITE TEST INHIBIT 0=ENABLE, 1=INHIBIT
29 COMMAND WORD ACKNOWLEDGE 0=NAK, 1=ACK
30-31 SSM
32 PARITY (ODD)
5.4.5. NVM Fault Data Extraction via Label 356 Maintenance Word.
The TCAS R/T maintenance fault memory can be decoded to troubleshoot system problems. The following procedure enables the
data dump mode. After completing the fault data extraction, be sure to disable the data dump mode. TCAS operation may be affected
if the data dump mode is not disabled. This procedure is written for the TTR-921/-4000 and does not apply to the TTR-2100.
a. To enable data dump mode, do the following.
(1) Turn on JcAIR 429EX data bus reader.
NOTE
These procedures are written for fault data extraction using a JcAIR 429EX data bus reader. Other models of
data bus readers may require different key entries or steps.
(2) Push TRAP.

(3) On the keyboard, type the numbers 356.
(4) Push ENT.
(5) Push ENT.
(6) Push TX/RX.
(7) Push T.
(8) Push EDIT/DEL.
(10) Push ENT.
(11) Push LAB/DAT.
(12) Push EDIT/DEL.
(14) Push ENT.
(15) Set top row switches to the following: TX PARITY to ODD, TX SPEED to LO, RX SPEED to LO, and DISPLAY to
HEX.
5-62
(16) Connect RX port to CFDS OUT (RMP-SA, 9B). Ensure this connection is made first.
(17) Connect TX port to CFDS IN (RMP-8A, 8B).
(18) Push TX/RX.
(19) Make sure that labels fill up to 255.
(20) Push T.
(21) Push LAB/DAT.
(22) Record data.
(23) Push LAB/DAT.
(24) Repeat steps (20) through (23) to show remaining label 356 data words up to number 255.
b. Disable Data Mode Dump.
NOTE
To disable data mode dump on aircraft, cycle TCAS power.
(1) Turn off JcAIR 429EX data bus reader.

(2) Turn on JcAIR 429EX data bus reader.
(3) Push TX/RX.
(4) Push T.
(5) Push EDIT/DEL.
(7) Push ENT.
(8) Push LAB/DAT.
(9) Push EDIT/DEL.
(11) Push ENT.
c. Decoding Data: The TCAS R/T maintenance fault memory may be decoded using the information found in the tables of Table
5-6, Table 5-7, and Table 5-8. Table 5-6 lists the addresses of the tags for each flight leg and flight fault. Table 5-7 lists the
meaning of the tags. Table 5-8 lists the fault monitor and associated hexadecimal code. To decode the data use the following
procedure.
(1) Locate the addresses listed in Table 5-6, column one and eliminate all addresses with a data value of 0000H. No data has
been written into these flight leg records.
(2) Continue inspecting addresses listed in column one and eliminate all addresses with a data value of 0003H. These indicate
that no flight faults occurred during this flight leg.
(3) Inspect addresses in columns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and locate an address with the value of 0001H. This points to the current flight
leg/flight fault record. The next fault data to occur is written to this record. The next tag is the oldest flight fault: the
previous tag is the newest fault.
If the tag is 0000H, continue to the next tag with a value of 0002H.
The self-test word pointer will contain a 0002H if self-test was performed on the ground prior to the flight. The MFM
(maintenance fault memory) data should only contain information on the systems that do not exist in that particular aircraft
(i.e. digital systems in an analog aircraft).
(4) Using a form similar to the following to generate a table for the current flight leg.
5-63
SELF TEST OLDEST FAULT 2 FAULT 3 NEWEST CURRENT

FAULT 1 FAULT 4 FAULT
ADDR: 404E 4039 4040 4047 402B 4032
DATA: 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0001
Word 0 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000
Word 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Word 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Word 3 01E0 0640 0600 0600 0600
Word 4 0080 01C0 0000 0000 0000
Word 5 0040 0000 0000 0000 0000
(5) The example provides the following aircraft data. Self-test indicates the aircraft status at the time of the last on-ground
self test prior to the flight leg. Fault 1 is the oldest data in Maintenance Fault Memory (MFM), fault 4 is the newest data.
The data in the current fault should be ignored. The next flight fault data will be written in the current fault location.
0400H. Word 3 indicates that both digital Line Replaceable Assembly (LRA) buses, the digital heading bus and the dig-
ital maintenance bus were inactive. As the example is an analog aircraft, this is normal. Word 4 indicates the #2 analog
LRA was inactive (again, normal as the example aircraft has only one analog LRA system). Word 5 Crew Alerting Sys-
tem (CAS) activity may be ignored.
The current fault data is ignored. Faults 1 through 4 indicate that both Mode S transponders were faulted and that the
maintenance bus was inactive. The latter is normal for the example aircraft and should be ignored.
(6) Prior flight leg data may be reviewed in the same manner. The following shows the previous flight leg from the same
example unit.
SELF TEST OLDEST FAULT 2 FAULT 3 NEWEST CURRENT

FAULT 1 FAULT 4 FAULT
ADDR: 4024 4016 401D 4001 4008 400F
DATA: 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0003
Word 0 0400 0000 0400 0400 0400
Word 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Word 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Word 3 01E0 0640 0180 0180 0180
Word 4 0080 01C0 0080 0090 0090
Word 5 0000 0000 0080 0080 0000
The self-test data again indicates the failure of the Frequency Source 1030 monitor. The others are normal for the example
aircraft. Faults 1 through 4 indicate similar activity as occurred during the current flight leg.
5-64
Table 5-6. Pointer Addresses.
FLIGHT LEG/ FLIGHT FAULT FLIGHT FAULT FLIGHT FAULT FLIGHT FAULT SELF TEST
FLIGHT FAULT
4001 4008 400F 4016 401D 4024
402B 4032 4039 4040 43B2 404E
4055 405C 4063 406A 4071 4078
407F 4086 408D 4094 409B 40A2
40A9 40B0 40B7 40BE 40C5 40CC

40D3 40DA 40E1 40E8 40EF 40F6
40FD 4104 410B 4112 4119 4120
4127 412E 4135 413C 4143 414A
4151 4158 415F 4166 416D 4174

417B 4182 4189 4190 4197 419E
41A5 41AC 41B3 41BA 41C1 41C8
41CF 41D6 41DD 41E4 41EB C1F2
41F9 4200 4207 420E 4215 421C

4223 422A 4231 4238 423F 4246
424D 4254 425B 4262 4269 4270
4277 427E 4285 428C 4293 429A
42A1 42A8 42AF 42B6 42BD 42C4
42CB 42D2 42D9 42E0 42E7 42EE

42F5 42FC 4303 430A 4311 4318
431F 4326 432D 4334 433B 4342
4349 4350 4357 435E 4365 436B

4373 437A 4381 4388 438F 4396
439D 43A4 43AB 43B2 43B9 43BF
5-65
Table 5-7. Pointer Flag Status.
TAG VALUE MEANING

0000 NO DATA RECORDED IN DATA BLOCK.
0001 CURRENT FLIGHT LEG - NO DATA RECORDED.
0002 FAULT DATA RECORDED IN DATA BLOCK.
0003 NO FLIGHT FAULTS RECORDED.
Table 5-8. TCAS R/T Maintenance Fault Memory Word/Bit Definition.
MONITOR FAULT BIT FAULT MASK NOTES

WORD NUM-
BER
TTR-920 TTR-921
MTL Adjustment DSP Card 0 0 0 0001 1
Calibration Auto-tune Data 0 1 1 0002 1
Fault Word 1 Bit 2 CAL_PULSE_PWR 0 2 2 0004
Mode C Receiver Beam Steering Network 0 3 3 0008 1
Whisper Shout Rsvd - Whisper Shout 0 4 4 0010 1
Transmitter Rsvd - Transmitter 0 5 5 0020 1
Bottom Antenna Bottom Antenna 0 6 6 0040 2
Bottom Antenna Conn. Bottom Antenna Connector 0 7 7 0080 2
Top Antenna Top Antenna 0 8 8 0100 2
Top Antenna Connector Top Antenna Connector 0 9 9 0200 2
Frequency Source 1030 Frequency Source 1030 0 10 10 0400 1
Fault Word 1 Bit 11 Protocol Monitor 0 11 11 0800
Cable Calibration Frequency Source 1090 0 12 12 1000 1
IF Adjust Phase Detector 0 13 13 2000 1
Fault Word 2 Bit 14 Receiver Calibration Bottom 0 14 14 4000
Fault Word 1 Bit 15 Transmitter Calibration Top 0 15 15 8000
Receiver Receiver 1 0 16 0001 1
Fault Word 2 Bit 1 spare 1 1 17 0002
Mode S Decode Receiver Calibration 1 2 18 0004 1
Mode C Decode Transmitter Calibration 1 3 19 0008 1
Fault Word 2 Bit 4 Fault Word 2 Bit 4 1 4 20 0010
5-66
Table 5-8. TCAS R/T Maintenance Fault Memory Word/Bit Definition. - Continued

WORD NUM-
BER
TTR-920 TTR-921
Severe Hot Temp at Fail Severe Hot Temp at Fail 1 10 26 0400
Hot Temp at Fail Hot Temp at Fail 1 11 27 0800
Normal Temp at Fail Normal Temp at Fail 1 12 28 1000
Ambient Temp at Fail Ambient Temp at Fail 1 13 29 2000
Cold Temp at Fail Cold Temp at Fail 1 14 30 4000
SP AID Part Number Invalid SP AID Part Number Invalid 1 15 31 8000
CPUA ROM CPUS ROM 2 0 32 0001 1
CPUB ROM Spare 2 1 33 0002 1
CPUl ROM CPUl ROM 2 2 34 0004 1
CPU SP ROM CPU SP ROM 2 3 35 0008 1
CPUA RAM CPUS RAM 2 4 36 0010
CPUB RAM Spare 2 5 37 0020
CPUI RAM CPUI RAM 2 6 38 0040
CPU SP RAM CPU SP RAM 2 7 39 0080
CPUA to Global RAM CPUS to Global RAM 2 8 40 0100 1
CPUB to Global RAM Spare 2 9 41 0200 1
CPUl to Global RAM CPUl to Global RAM 2 10 42 0400 1
CPUAto Dual Port RAM CPUS to Dual Port RAM 2 11 43 0800 1
CPUB to Dual Port RAM Spare 2 12 44 1000 1
CPUl to Dual Port RAM CPUl to Dual Port RAM 2 13 45 2000 1
CPUA Instructions CPUS Instructions 2 14 46 4000 1
CPUB Instructions Spare 2 15 47 8000 1
CPUl Instructions CPUl Instructions 3 0 48 0001 1
CPUA Cross Check CPUS Cross Check 3 1 49 0002 1
CPUB Cross Check CPUB Cross Check 3 2 50 0004 1
CPUl Cross Check CPUl Cross Check 3 3 51 0008 1
Attitude Bus Activity Attitude Bus Activity 3 4 52 0010 3
Heading Bus Activity Heading Bus Activity 3 5 53 0020 3
Maint. Bus Activity Maint. Bus Activity 3 6 54 0040 3
Radio Alt 1 Bus Activity Radio Alt 1 Bus Activity 3 7 55 0080 4
5-67

WORD NUM-
BER
TTR-920 TTR-921
Radio Alt 2 Bus Activity Radio Alt 2 Bus Activity 3 8 56 0100 4
Mode S Xponder 1 Bus Activity Mode S Xponder 1 Bus Activity 3 9 57 0200 5
Mode S Xponder 2 Bus Activity Mode S Xponder 2 Bus Activity 3 10 58 0400 5
Maint Bus Wrap Around Maint Bus Wrap Around 3 11 59 0800 1
RA Display Bus 1 Wrap Around RA Display Bus 1 Wrap Around 3 12 60 1000 1
RA Display Bus 2 Wrap Around RA Display Bus 2 Wrap Around 3 13 61 2000 1
TA Display Bus 1 Wrap Around TA Display Bus 1 Wrap Around 3 14 62 4000 1
TA Display Bus 2 Wrap Around TA Display Bus 2 Wrap Around 3 15 63 8000 1
XPDR 1 Bus Wrap Around XPDR 1 Bus Wrap Around 4 0 64 0001 1
XPDR 2 Bus Wrap Around XPDR 2 Bus Wrap Around 4 1 65 0002 1
RA Display 1 Status Discrete RA Display 1 Status Discrete 4 2 66 0004 6
RA Display 2 Status Discrete RA Display 2 Status Discrete 4 3 67 0008 6
TA Display 1 Status Discrete TA Display 1 Status Discrete 4 4 68 0010 3
TA Display 2 Status Discrete TA Display 2 Status Discrete 4 5 69 0020 3
Radio Alt Analog 1 Activity Radio Alt Analog 1 Activity 4 6 70 0040 4
Radio Alt Analog 2 Activity Radio Alt Analog 2 Activity 4 7 71 0080 4
Mag Heading Analog Activity Mag Heading Analog Activity 4 8 72 0100 3
Baro Altitude Activity A to D Converter 4 9 73 0200 1
Radio Alt Analog 1 Bias Radio Alt Analog 1 Bias 4 10 74 0400 1
Radio Alt Analog 2 Bias Radio Alt Analog 2 Bias 4 11 75 0800 1
Coordination Lock Timeout Coordination Lock Timeout 4 12 76 1000 1
Resolution Message Queue Full Resolution Message Queue Full 4 13 77 2000 1
CAS Output Missing CAS Output Missing 4 14 78 4000 1
Radio Alt Digital 1 Bias Radio Alt Digital 1 Bias 4 15 79 8000 1
Radio Alt Digital 2 Bias Radio Alt Digital 2 Bias 4 0 80 0001 1
RA Display 1 BITE RA Display 1 BITE 4 1 81 0002 6
RA Display 2 BITE RA Display 2 BITE 4 2 82 0004 6
OWN-MODE-S-ID Fault OWN-MODE-S-ID Fault 5 3 83 0008 1
Spare Bar0 Alt Credibility 5 4 84 0010
Spare Barometric Altitude Activity 5 5 85 0020 7
Spare Spare 5 6 86 0040 7
5-68

WORD NUM-
BER
TTR-920 TTR-921
AD Timeout RALT 1 AD Timeout RALT 1 5 10 90 0400
AD Timeout RALT 2 AD Timeout RALT 2 5 11 91 0800
AD Timeout Heading AD Timeout Heading 5 12 92 1000
Power Up Fail Power Up Fail 5 13 93 2000
Signal Processor Dead Signal Processor Dead 5 14 94 4000
No SRU Failure No SRU Failure 5 15 95 8000
NOTE
1. TRE-920 internal monitors will cause TCAS FAIL message.
2. TRE-920 Directional antenna monitors will cause TCAS system failure (TCAS FAIL message).
3. System interface monitors will not cause a TCAS system failure.
4. Low range radar altimeter monitors will cause a TCAS system failure only if all four monitors are failed (TCAS FAIL mes-
sage).
5. Mode S transponder monitors will cause a TCAS system failure only if both monitors are failed (TCAS FAIL message).
6. Resolution Advisory display monitors will cause a TCAS system failure only if a No. 1 and No. 2 monitor are failed (TCAS
FAIL message).
7. TTR-920/-921 internal monitors used in product development and should be ignored.
5-69/(5-70 Blank)
523-0820642
CHAPTER 6
Bulletins
6.1. SERVICE BULLETINS AND SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS.

Refer to the latest edition/addendum of the Business and Regional Systems Service Bulletin (SB)/Service Information Letter (SIL)
Index 523-0766944 for an up-to-date listing. Refer to Table 6-1 for SBs/SILs included in this IM.
Table 6-1. Service Bulletins and Service Information Letters.
SB/SIL NUMBER UNIT TITLE DATE

SIL 10-1 (523-0818455- TTR-920/-921 TCAS CHANGE 7.1 April 09, 2010
001000) INFORMATION (MOPS
DO-185B)
SERVICE BULLETIN 504 TTR-921 TCAS CHANGE 7.1 January 27, 2012
REVISION NO. 3 SOFTWARE UPGRADE
SERVICE BULLETIN TTR-2100 REDUCE TCAS FAILURE October 31, 2014
TTR-2100-34-1 INDICATIONS AFTER
INITIAL POWER
APPLICATION
6-1/(6-2 Blank)
523-0820642
© 2016, Rockwell Collins
All Rights Reserved, Printed in USA

Rockwell Collins Tcas System Installation Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rockwell Collins Tcas System Installation Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

installation

TCAS II Traffic Alert and

Export Control Classification Number (ECCN) for this document is

© 2016 Rockwell Collins. All rights reserved.

TO: HOLDERS OF ROCKWELL COLLINS TCAS II TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION

DESCRIPTION OF EDITION NO 3, REVISION 1

DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE

Printed in the United States of America Rockwell Collins

Export Control Classification Number (ECCN) for this document is 7E994.

FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT (5 USC 552) AND DISCLOSURE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

© 2013-2016 ROCKWELL COLLINS. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Send your comments to: Rockwell Collins

For product orders or inquiries, please contact: Rockwell Collins

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original 0 . . . . . . 03 December 2015 Change 1 . . . . . . . . . . 04 March 2016

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 302 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change

T-1 - T-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

*Zero in this column indicates an original page.

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

Page *Change Page *Change Page *Change

*Zero in this column indicates an original page.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Number Title Page

Number Title Page

THE MATERIAL IN THIS MANUAL IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE. BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY

2. ACRONYM AND ABBREVIATION , AND MNEMONICS.

LED Light-Emitting Diode

To submit comments regarding this manual, please contact:

or send email to: pubstrain@rockwellcollins.com

1. GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS.

SERVICE PERSONNEL ARE TO OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SUCH AS WEARING

THIS UNIT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) COMPONENTS AND

Figure 1. ESDS Caution Symbol

FAILURE TO HANDLE ESDS DEVICES AS DESCRIBED ABOVE CAN PERMANENTLY DAMAGE

1.2. EQUIPMENT COVERED.

Figure 1-1. TCAS II Equipment

1.3. PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT.

1.4. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION.

1.4.1. Equipment Covered, Related Rublications, and Configurations Matrices.

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered in this Manual.

MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION ROCKWELL

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered in this Manual. - Continued

MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION ROCKWELL

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered in this Manual. - Continued

MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION ROCKWELL

Table 1-2. TVI-920 Configuration Matrix.

PART NUMBER PANEL COLOR SWITCH FUNCTIONS

Table 1-2. TVI-920 Configuration Matrix. - Continued

PART NUMBER PANEL COLOR SWITCH FUNCTIONS

Table 1-3. TVI-920D Configuration Matrix.

PART NUMBER PANEL COLOR SWITCH FUNCTIONS

Table 1-3. TVI-920D Configuration Matrix. - Continued

PART NUMBER PANEL COLOR SWITCH FUNCTIONS

Table 1-4. TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix.

Table 1-4. TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix. - Continued

Table 1-4. TTC-920( ) Configuration Matrix. - Continued

1.4.2. Svstem Specifications.

Table 1-5. TCAS II System, Specifications.

Table 1-5. TCAS II System, Specifications. - Continued

Aircraft Climbing: 600 ft AGL 1100 ft AGL

Page Change Page Change Page *Change

Page Change Page Change Page *Change